Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2002-R0537 - Contract For Construction For City Facility Renovations - Wardroup & Associates - 12_12_2002
Resolution No. 2002-RO537 December 12, 2002 Item No. 38 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for construction of security measures at various city facilities and City Secretary Office renovations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Wardroup and Associates, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: 12th day of December , 2002. Victor Kilm n, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: aonald G. Vandiver First Assistant City Attorney gs/ccdocs/Contract-Wardroup and Assoc.res Dec. 2, 2002 J ""A City Of PL'a.p..nied Ixogress"' CITY OF LUBBOCK Ldbbo- ck I xas City of Lubbock cc_" PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #233-02/RS, Addendum #2 ADDENDUM #2 ITB #233-02/RS Construction of Security Measures at Various City Facilities and City Secretary Office Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: October 25, 2002 CLOSE DATE: October 30, 2002 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above.named.Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this .. addendum, shall remain in effect. Please find enclosed addendum #2 from Landress Architecture and a current.plan holder's list. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us �- THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK r Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer r� 233-02Add2 LANDRESS .�, ARCHITECTURE EXPIRES 02/28/03 UAk 'Yp IN tY -V V vi �., _ LAfVDR�SS s;qT 6120 1�P� ARCHITECTURE £ OF A"O 02- PROJECT: Facilities Security Project City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX ADDENDUM NO. TWO (2) pow DATE: October 25, 2002 n*e NOTE: All Proposers are required to review the following changes, deletions or additions to the project's plans and specifications and adjust the amounts shown in their proposals accordingly. This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the Bidding Documents dated August 14, 2002, with amendments and additions noted below. A, Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided in the Proposal. Failure to do so may disqualify your proposal. r-+ Numeral sequence continued from previous addenda. This Addendum consists of 7 pages. GENERAL: a. 2. CLARIFICATION —Access Doors at Municipal Building on East Wall are keyed per Section 08305 ACCESS DOORS �-, 3, CLARIFICATION —weight loop for overhead grill is partof Section 08341 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES. 4. CLARIFICATION - Section 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES: 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION, B. Indoors: .., Requirements for PVC coated Rigid Metallic Conduit apply to Water Reclamation Plant. SPECIFICATIONS: 5: REVISE to read — Section 08800 GLAZING: Paragraph 1.10 WARRANTY a. Section 01700 —Contract Closeout b. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty, covering replacement film materials and film 1 N LANDRESS. ARCHITECTURE installation labor, against adhesive failure, film discoloration and distortion, peeling or delamination, and on film -protected units that are intentionally broken, for the life of the installation. c. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for laminated glass. 6. REVISE to read — Section 08800 GLAZING: Paragraph 2.1 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS I. to read as follows: Surface Applied Security Film: Mylar type minimum .008" nominal thick, visible light transmittance of 35% and solar light transmittance of 356/6, shading coefficient of .64, 60" minimum width. S. ADD — Section 11153 BARRIER GATE OPERATOR - attached to end of this addenda. 7. DELETE — Section 013760 VIDEO SURVALLIANCE EQUIPMENT in its entirety. .R, 8. ADD — Section 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS E. Contractors may utilize THHN 75 Degree C conductors in all facilities except the.Water Reclamation Facility, which shall be XHHW-2. DRAWINGS: 9. REVISE to read — General Notes: A on Sheet E1 to read: Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to install conduit and pull wire for a complete and operational system provided by the owner. Provide control console at the security desk on the first floor and at the maintenance office in the basement. 10. REVISE to read — General Notes: A on Sheet E3 to read: Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to install conduit and pull wire for a complete and operational system provided by the owner. Provide control console at the security desk on the first floor and at the maintenance office in the basement. 11. MODIFY — Sheet E7 Note C to read as follows: C. SCOPE: The contractor shall provide pole mounted infrared beam detector system to protect "Chlorine Storage Facility" as shown. The contractor shall provide all infrared beam detectors and route conduit to existing equipment as shown. The contractor shall provide all cabling, power supplies, contacts, relays and final connections to existing alarm system. Note: Contractor shall coordinate. and verify clear site lines prior to setting infrared beam towers. All conduit shall be PVC coated rigid conduit and. shall be routed underground to the exterior wall of the building and up entering overhead and suspend as required to the control panel on the south wall. END OF ADDENDUM NO. TWO .� 2 0" X" Facilities Security Project 0201 1 SECTION 11153 — BARRIER GATE OPERATOR PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install a complete microprocessor based barrier gate operator system, with a solid- state board to control all functions of the barrier operator, as described herein and shown on the plans. Include all necessary boards, power supplies, loop detectors, barrier arm(s), connectors, and accessories for a complete operational system. 1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. All equipment and work specified in this section shall comply, with all General Conditions of the specifications, contract documents, and drawings as indicated. 1.3 RELATED WORK: A. Parking control contractor shall coordinate all work with other contractors and trades where necessary. B. All necessary conduit, raceways, and pull boxes shall be installed by the electrical contractor. C. Installation of the barrier gate operator system shall be coordinated with the installation of other parking control related systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes. B. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of barrier gate operator equipment. C. Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of seven (7) years from date of shipment. D. if required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions, and operating characteristics to the Owner. E. System shall be indicated by a factory -authorized contractor, with technicians specifically trained in this system. F. On -site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within four (4) hours of notification.for emergency condition. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. Vehicular Barrier Gate Operator shall be in compliance with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety —. Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems, UL 325 Fourth Edition; and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety — Tests for Safety - Related Controls Employing Solid -State Devices, UL 991 Second Edition. B. Vehicular Barrier Gate Operator shall be tested for compliance to UL 325 and UL 991 and shall be LISTED by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). BARRIER GATE OPERATOR Section 11153 Page 1 N Facilities Security Project 1.6 SUBMITTALS: A. Provisions: Comply with Section 01300 SUBMITTALS. 0201 B. Shall include an equipment list; data sheet(s), system description, block diagrams on equipment. to be finished, and electrical wiring diagrams for installation. C. Shall include all data necessary to evaluate design, quality, and configuration of proposed equipment and system(s). 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Systems shall include.a factory warranty that equipment is free from defects in design, material, manufacturing, and operation. B. Factory warranty period shall be for two (2) years parts and workmanship; 24-months from date of shipment. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of the product. C. Installing contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire and installation for 12-months from date of acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �., A. The system as described herein, is based on the Model 1602 vehicular barrier gate operator system, manufactured by DoorKing, Inc., Inglewood, California. The vehicular barrier gate system specified meets requirements of the specifications and shall be considered as the acceptable Base Bid. B. Substitutions must meet requirements of Prior Approval, as outlined in the contract documents. Substitutions that meet Prior Approval requirements must be listed as alternates by addendum, and shall be shown separately on the bid forms. Consideration will be based on ability to comply with all aspects of the specifications, the desired functional operation, quality, reliability, design, size, and appearance of the equipment, and the support capabilities of the manufacturer. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Technical Data: a. The barrier gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state control board that controls all functions of the barrier operator. The system is designed so that mechanical relays or limit switches are not required. These operators are rated for continuous duty for use in commercial and industrial applications. Model 1602: . - Low -cycle wide -lane applications. - Maximum barrier gate arm length is 20 feet. - 1 horsepower continuous duty motor, operates at 115/ 230 volts single-phase, or 230/ 460 volts three-phase AC power only. Typical current draw is 9.2 amps at 115 V; 4.6 amps at 230 V; 2.3 amps at 460 V. - Primary reduction and power transfer is provided by a double cog belt driving a 60:1 worm gear reducer running in a continuous oil bath. - The operator will rotate the arm 90 degrees in approximately 3 seconds. b. Gear reducer output shall use 360 degrees rotation to avoid wear. c. Power is transmitted to the gate arm drive shaft through harmonic acting crank and connecting arm. d. Crank, connecting arm, and main shaft shall be solid steel construction and plated to avoid rusting. e. Mechanical action of the driven arm shall be such that mechanical stops or braking BARRIER GATE OPERATOR Section 11153 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 1 Infrared thru-beam, 165 foot sensing distance (p/n 8080-010). Photo -reflective beam, 30 foot sensing distance (p/n 8080-011). c. Contact Edges: Padded contact edge sensors reverse gate -arm on contact with' any object. Specify Miller Edge Model ME120, ME123, MG020, MGR20, and MGS20. d. Back -Up Drive System: - A battery powered DC drive system is available as a factory installed option. - The DC drive system shall monitor the primary power source and shall automatically power the gate up when power to the operator is interrupted. When power is restored, the DC drive system shall automatically set the operator to return to normal operation and disengage. The system shall provide a trickle charge to the batteries to maintain nominal battery power levels. e. Gate Tracker: The vehicular barrier gate operator shall have output for cohnection to the optional Gate Tracker control board. Gate. Tracker shall maintain a detailed electronic record of cycles, input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and each time power is applied to the operator. This record shall be time and date stamped and shall be analyzed using the DoorKing Remote Account Manager for Windows software. (A DoorKing 1803PC, 1815, 1817, or 1818 access system is required for Gate Tracker operations.) f. Traffic Control Spikes: Model 1610, traffic control spikes are designed to allow traffic to precede in one direction only. This mechanical spike system is mechanically activated and requires no power for operation. Each spike is independently spring loaded with a stainless steel spring. CAUTION: Traffic spike systems are not intended to be used in areas where vehicular traffic is uncontrolled or crosses over the spikes at an angle other than 90 degrees, or where traffic speeds may exceed 5 MPH. Speed bumps, warning signs, and/or stop signs are recommended to control traffic when using these spike systems. This in ground system is 72" long, 8'/z" wide, and 6" deep. g. Warning Sign: Model 1615, warning sign is intended for use with the 1610 traffic spike unit. This sign provides a means to inform traffic that a one-way lane condition exists. The red side of the sign wams traffic to stop, while the green side advises traffic not to back up. The sign is illuminated for night use by two 20-watt fluorescent lamps that automatically turn on at dusk and turn off at dawn. The sign includes a 150-watt flood lamp to illuminate the traffic } spikes. The sign is powered by 115-volt single-phase power only and is designed to be mounted on a three inch mounting pipe. The sign measures 24" square and is 8" wide. D. A complete operational system shall be provided. n PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Shall be installed by qualified technicians who have been factory trained and certified. B. Equipment shall be mounted directly to a concrete pad, firmly secured, plumb, and level. C. Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturers instructions. D. All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards. E. AIi cable runs in all junction boxes shall be tagged and identified. F. Coordinate all work with other effected trades and contractors. 3.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING: A. System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of specifications and on -site conditions. B. System shall function as specified. BARRIER GATE OPERATOR Section 11153 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.3 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES: A. System shall be completely tested to assure that all components, and accessories are' hooked -up and in working order. B. System shall be pre -tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance with plans and specifications. C. System shall be tested in presenceof owner's representative. 3.4 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS: A. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of instruction in use and operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of acceptance. B. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of technical training, in trouble shooting and service of the system,"to designated owner representatives within (90) days of system acceptance. 3.5 MANUALS AND DRAWINGS: A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of standard factory prepared operation, installation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical wiring diagrams. B. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of any risers, layouts, and special wiring diagrams showing any changes to standard drawings, if required on project. 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. The manufacturer recommends periodic maintenance at three-month intervals as described in the installation and maintenance manual. B. External reversing devices should be checked at least once a month. End of Schedule Vol BARRIER GATE OPERATOR Section 11153 Page 5 pill REGISTER OF •BIE) DOCUMENTS AIA DOCUMENT C804 1 QQ PROJECT: lKa+"•�'�"�' PROJECT NO: OWNER: REFUNDABLE' DEPOSIT FOR _ 1 SETS CONTRACT: *■■+ NON-REFUNDABLE CHARGES: NOTICE FOR BIDS DATE: Cj INVITED LIST [) OPEN PkLQUALIFICATION $ COMPLETE SET Oct.3v�.t� AM TIME SHEET OF rye BIDS. DUE DATE`. I M LONE 5 DRAWINGS AT: • PAGE OF era ADDENDA DATES 1 2. 3 $ SPECIFICATIONS 4. �. ADUENUA RECIPIENT DEPOSIT OR CHARGE DUCLEMENTS C i i U AMOUNT -% _ i c /. � ! �- = = 7 .� •r..� 0 C- 5 r - -` ! - PARTIAL SETS UESCRIPI IC)N NANiE ADDRESS I HO'�E 1 7 1 . 4 i / �/ OAA C,11 I i8 � 14 q NCO`'' 2. P fA�.�v ? 60 3- Sa C 3 P ft Pie o l J 17c0 3-s a-cf 3 F x- r� J t� t -cat-`w.�- Pf-i 7'�.5-. 8`�3Z a 10 yR 3- zU 10 ,o pta to ' 1Q1 10 1 J 1 I pro ge,G —�q II .c � G- 4g 3 a J `i' 1 1 RG-C- �� 'x!6 ? ((,5 P, yK rg3 z��o t o 10 jb }o MttJnityG. / ,o w ✓ Vo.,c� -7c?8 •'7 33s" 13 1 CF to 704-44 rs$?, P111 7 FAy. I�F� u �. G = 1b 1L ,,c j y 10 • , �c 7'f $ - i ari,� � - A :,z�rJ/ 106 /10 5 -aoz9 2.5 2 AIA DOCUMENT GROG • REGISTER Of CID DOCLJMEN'TS • APRIL 1970 EDITIC)N • AIACR • CC 1970 P:1GE 1 OF 2 THE AMERif-A\ 1�,s17ruIE fir ARCH ITECTS.171; NEW YORK AVE . NAV., WASHINGTCIN, D.C.20006 1 CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 440" Browntield D,;Ve TEXAS 79410 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T"STREET LURSOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775.2167 PAX: (806)773-2164 http,4urchasigg.ci.l y bback. tx.us ITS 9233-02/RS. Addendum #1 ADDENDUM 91 ITB #233-02/RS Construction of Security Measures at Various City Facilities and City Secretary Office Renovaticns MAILED TO VENDOR: October 23, 2002 CLOSE DATE: October 30, 2002 a 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid ilTB). Where any item called for in the ITg documents is supp emented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Please find enclosed addendum #1 from Landress Architecture. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to. Ron Sheffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79437 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: rshuffieldemail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK 4 Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer 233-02Add 1 180-� f0!l0'd 81Z-i t9lZ9L1908 9NlSV'H3i+E1d-113399f11 do 11I3-mojd wtc:30 20-Et-1:0 t0-23-62:t0: 3�AM: LAIVpRESS ARCH17EC7: .gCg"4�?GF a Please note that the addendum No. 1 on the City Facilities Security. Project was sent prematurely last week. The addendum No. 1 that was sent today from the city is the correct one. We are sorry for any confusion this might have caused. Thanks, K. Landress Landress Architecture, Inc. 806 747-0991 LANDRESS ARCHITECTURE EXPIRES 02%28J03 ,E o "ey 6120 £ OF �E PROJECT: Facilities Security Project City of Lubbock Lubbock,TX ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) DATE- October 22, 2002 NOTE: All Proposers are required to review the following changes. deletions or additions to the projects plans and specifications and adjust the amounts shown in their proposals accordingly. This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the Bidding Documents dated August 14, 2002, with amendments and'additions noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided in the Proposal, Failure to do so may disqualify your proposal This Addendum consists of 2 pages. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 08800 GLAZING: MODIFY Paragraph 1.10 WARRANTY to read as follows., a. Section 01700 , Contract Closeout b. provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty, covering replacement film materials and film installation tabor, against adhesive failure, film discoloration and distortion. peeling or delamination, and on film -protected units that are intentionally broken, for the life of the Installation. c. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for laminated glass. 2. Sectlon 08800 GLAZING: MODIFY Paragraph 2.1 FLAT" GLASS MATERIALS 1, to read as follows: Surface Applied Security Film: Mylartype .009" nomina! thick, visible light transmittance of 350/o and 1 180-d EOlZO'd 812-i W Z911908 9N!SyHOidnd-k0098n1 d0 4110-m014. um8!:90 ZO-E2-100 A•. am LANDRESS ARCHITECTURE solar light transmittance of 35%. shading coefficient of .64. go" minimum width. DRAWINGS: 1. SHEET E7 MODIFY Note C to read as follows: C. SCOPE: The contractor shall provide pole mounted Infrared beam detector system to protect "Chlorine Storage Facility" as shown. The contractor shall provide all infrared beam,. detectors and route conduit to existing equipment as shown. The contractor shall provide all cabing, power Supplies, contacts, relays and final connections to existing alarm system. Note: Contractor shall coordinate'and verity clear site iines prior to setting, infrared beam towers. Ali conduit shall be PVC coated rigid conduit and shall be routed underground to the exterior wall of the building and uo entering overhead and suspend as required to the control panel on the south wall. END OF: ADDENDUM ND. ONE 2 180-� £0!£0d 61Z-: t91Z4�l908 nN1SVH^.Nn?-Y,a-'66f11 �0 },i15-WO;j UM81:30 70-£Z-1DO 4 MR PA P" CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 233-02/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 9193.8107.10000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT P" R-, 1. 2. �* 3. 4. 5. 6. r� 7. 8. 9. 10. INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS s NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #233-02/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 o'clock p.m. on the 30th day of October, 2002, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 o'clock p.m. on the 30th day of October, 2002, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 14th day of November, 2002, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. E The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 22nd day of October, 2002 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13'h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 "" refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Landress Architecture, Inc., 1720 Avenue M, Lubbock, Texas 79401, Phone: (806) 747-0991. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this !^'^ advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. r^ The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock ADA Coordinator at (806) 775-2018 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK FM VICTOR KIL AN PURCHASING MANAGER 0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 3:00 p.m. CST, the 30th day of October, 2002 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: r* "ITS #233-021RS, CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman; Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 y Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he is use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING ., 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m.. October 22nd. 2002 in En-Wrieerinu Conference Room 107, Lubbock. Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. a, - 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of n Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it — shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and — adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. — 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from — public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CON FIDENTIAUPROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. — 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may — be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. MM 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders: 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the combinations thereof. inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY IMFbI�IVIATION VER - LM ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONOR CLAMFIC�► Ot4 C©NCE.RNING THTS INVITATION TOR111 (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITIN NO LA'1`'Ei� THAN FIVE (5) CALENDA1'h MAYS PRIdR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13" Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within ONE HUNDRED FIFTY (150) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder: 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. .•� 3 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. -- 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at anytime, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be _ delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. — 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. 4 m� M Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions ., of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the V project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. ,., 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be ,., necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and - replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of ^^ acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. - 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and +** telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as g required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City �^ and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this """ 5 contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be — submitted before contract execution. 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 25.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 25.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the — Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on — weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES e• Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: a, 28.3.1 . Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the "^ following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. 0) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy �* 7 the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services, 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to accept the Base Bid and Alternate in any order or combination that serves its best interest. The low bid shall be determined on the pace combination of the Total Base Bid and any accepted Bid Alternate. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. BID SUBMITTAL I- A-% I W BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT „,PATE: ) D \ 3y i a -- dROJECT NUMBER: #233-021RS - CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS lid of WARDKOUP BSc (hereinafter called Bidder) vTo the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY 4EASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES R CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of Ahe intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project �cluding the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct Jie project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract ""ocuments. BASE BID: SECURITY INSTALLATION AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES AND CITY SECRETARY'S OFFICE ENOVATIONS „ARTERIALS: �� G tr �o�7e►.". SiyiCGu, / Z,J Ir J,1 Z_ ""ERVIC TOTAL r�cv •— v- v-rsc�J LTERNATE #1 (ADD): COMPLETE INTERIOR FINISH AND ENCLOSING VESTIBULE AT EAST ENTRANCE OF `MUNICIPAL BUILDING AND ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATION AT MUNICIPAL BUILDING 'OTAL ALTERNATE #1: .<7Oy,da ) ,,,(,Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govem.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 150 (ONE HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive ""alendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to jay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions ,,,,o€ the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the idding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of*thirty (30) calendar days fter the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the tans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to . commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. ! h 11 I S �o� , d� VcfrlC� �nd � �- J gllov�.�, -�v r � i 2 1= Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a.cashier's check or. certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable !^"'without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid Is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ 1 or a Bid Bond In the sum of s'In Dollars ($ J, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the P"event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond. (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the ow -undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. ".(Seal if Bidder is a ration) ATTEST: eAn � Secretary WALLACE C . WARDROUP, Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date ,.Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date MIWBE Firm: ;Q D-;IS V . WARDROUP, PRESIDZNT (Printed or Typed Name) WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: '�� s' Fax: <-&c, - ? — s,-- Cds�tEtAC•ORS 44C5 lrhwrf elr. brine 8C5 i95-?01� iC:• v:. TLjY 0 CONTRACTORS 4402 Brownfield Live EO•;-7 5-8: - - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS �; :C. K. ' ``" `' Minority Owned Yes No 1. ❑ ❑ 2. ❑ ❑ 3. 0 ❑ 4. 0 ❑ 5. ❑ ❑ 6. 0 0 r-� 7. ❑ ❑ 8. ❑. ❑ 9. 0 ❑ 10. 0 0 0 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal 1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. WALLA(;,t 0. WARDRQUP, VIOL FREE ontractor (Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC, (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 00AJ ES, INC_. 440E Brownfield Drive • 806.795.8032 v i Name of Agent/Broker: Address of Agent/Broker: /Jo >e 4--tr City/State/Zip:�,c Agent/Broker, Telephone Number: Date: lCj�3v4o 2-- NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bidiproposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #233-02/RS - CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS 5 FWD 1 CITY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all the environmental and human s-* 'health protection laws associated with asbestos. Lubbock Business Center Building, located at 1301 Broadway, in Lubbock,'contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: SRrayed on acoustic ceiling material / Most of I' floor Type / Location: 12" X 12" floor tile, tan / V floor storage room. 2"d floor corridor Type / Location: Troweled -on stucco / covering first floor lobby columns Type / Location: The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative" in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. Contractor Name: WARDROUP & ASSOCIAl'E5, yd3iLli. ICII. C . V)44) Contractor Representative: Contractor Signature: mate: Attention Purchasing dept Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator " CITY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with asbestos. Health Department, located at 1902 Texas Avenue in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, tan with light & dark spots/ Rm. #'s 16-20, 22-24, 29-32, 51,_75, 76, 77, 79, 82, 83 Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, gray with light & dark spots/ Rm. # 21 Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" ceiling tile, regular perforations/ Rm. #50 The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. i Contractor Name: WARDR Q t t P cQ "^^ r l T rS I n s Contractor Representative: 'tt° P: G� p"3 . Contractor Signature: Date: /n /3a�a Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department. Attn: Asbestos Coordinator CITY OF, LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location. of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this. notification. in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with asbestos. Municipal Square (Information Technology), 916 Texas Avenue, in Lubbock, contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: 9" X 9" floor tile & mastic, green, / IT Room's # 17B-48 Type / Location: Type /'Location: . The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. WARDRGUP ASSOCIATES, ;N?C, Contractor Name: Contractor Representative: WALLACE C. ii nROUP, VIC& Pftir� �* Contractor Signature: Date: Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed documenf to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator 61 61 0 CTFY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of. Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all the environmental and human health protection laws associated with asbestos. Muuicipal Auditorium, located at 2720 6" Street, in Lubbock, contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: Mudded joints & elbows on domestic waterlines and boiler supply lines, boiler insulation, gray mudded ioints & elbows on original chiller lines / Basement Type / Location: Black mastic under 9" X 9" floor tile, tan with dark & light accents / through out building Type / Location: Gypsum wallboard tape & bedding I Orchestra pit Type / Location: Blown on acoustical treatment on scratch coat / Inner lobby above both silver striyoed ceilings Type / Location: Fiberglass lines with black fittings on chiller lines / Stage, lighting trough, crawl space between balcony & ground level ceiling Type / Location: Black tar covering fiberglass insulation on expansion tank / Lighting trough The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure; MIR Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the .disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City tepresenti tive in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above., Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. ASSOCIATES Contractor Name: WARDRQUP & ASSOCIATES, Contractor Representative: MALLAC C' 1rARuROUp, i►IC� p:=� Contractor Signature: - Date: d l z Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator CITY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all the environmental and- human health protection laws associated with asbestos. Civic Center, located at 1501 5t` Street, in Lubbock, contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: Vinyl stair & floor coverings / Exhibit hall stair wells Type / Location: 12" X 12". floor tile, blue with light & dark accents / HVAC office Type / Location: 12" X 12" floor file tan with dark accents / First aid room ticket booth, both first floor kitchenettes, booth first floor concession stands & closets Type / Location: The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and. not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have. been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Contractor Name: Contractor Representative: VALtUX 0, XARDROUF . V I C& pR , c Contractor Signature: Date: Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator N CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND - ACKNOWLEDGMENT Contractor/Company Name Contractor/Company Representative: (Print) WARDROUP (40Y ASSOCIATES, INC, WALLACE C . NARDFt"p , V i Clc eh" 'Description of work: 2 — A Municipal Square, located at 916 Texas Avenue. in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type I Location: Pipe fitting insulation, mudded joints / Rm. #'s B7, B29; B32 PB 102,110, 114, & MC 135 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile & mastic, beige / Rm. #'s B2, 4,10, 15, 16, 22, 23, 27; 127,128, 129A-132, 203 241-245, 248, & 250 Type / Location: 12 X 12 floor tile, white with gray accents / Rm. #'s B 17 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, white with light & dark accents / Rm. # 132 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, tan/light green/mastic / Rm. #'s IS 1, & 9-32 Type / Location: Type / Location: Type / Location: In no way should the above be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of asbestos in this building. Certain materials containing asbestos may be enclosed behind walls and be hidden from view. Any.material uncovered during a maintenance project that is suspected of containing asbestos should be reported to the City of Lubbock Facilities Management Department, and dealt with according to State and Federal asbestos laws. Only trained and licensed contractors may perform work that di asbestos cola ining materials (AC11). Signature:�� Date: �� -I— The completed, signed form must be sent to the Facilities Management Department, and will be added to this facility's Management Plan. i CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT Contractor/Company Name WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Contractor/Company WALLACZ C , MARDROUP, V I C& PRE. Representative: (Print) Description of work: G Municipal Building, located at 162513th Street, in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type / Location: Linoleum, simulated terrazzo / Rm. # 15 Type / Location: Therm. Sys. Ins., mud fittings / Rm. Ws 18, 19, 39, 204 ,311, & 348 Type / Location: Black mastic under cork insulation on duct work/Rm.#'s 18, 28,&401 Type / Location: 12" X 12" floor tile & mastic, bone with brown accents / Rm. Ws 109, 110, & 147 Type / Location: Cloth wrapped pipe insulation / Rm. # 204 Type / Location: Duct insulation sealant, white / Rm. Ws 18, & 311 Type / Location: Black mastic under cork insulation on pipe, black / Rm. # 18 Type / Location: Duct insulation patch, gray / Rm. # 401 In no way should the above be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of asbestos in this building. Certain materials containing asbestos maybe enclosed behind walls and be hidden from view. Any material uncovered during a maintenance project that is suspected of containing asbestos should be reported to the City of Lubbock Facilities Management Department, and dealt with according to State and Federal asbestos laws. Only trained and licensed contractors may perform work that disturbs asbestos containing materials (ACM). Signature: Date: The completed, signed form must be sent to the Facilities Management Department, and will be added to this facility's Management Plan. BID OR.PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Wardroup & Associates, Inc. (hereinafter ca e t e Principal), as Principal, And WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation -organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Arizona, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and f irmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid ------------------- Dollars ($------ (5%)-------------- ) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and each of our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly be these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, WHEREAS, the above bounden *-+ Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit the Obligee a bid or proposal for the Construction of Security Measures at Various City Facilities & City Secretary Office Renovations in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefore. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void: otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and said Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this 30th day of October 20 02 Wardroup & sates c. By WALL= e. W.SHIN N IN ERNATIONAL IN COMPA By ' BDB 600201 Cara D. Hancock Attorney in Fact r-- A NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under �1 the laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: KEVIN DUNN, CARA D. HANCOCK, FRED DAVIS AND HAROLD D. BINGGELI JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY r� its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held " on the 20 of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney, and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any t, certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached. �Nariuun�Hgi CZj By See t i - Paul D. Amsmm President & Chief Executive officer of Washington International insurance Company & ? 'CORPORATE t�y Gf1l m = Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company 3,9 �z ts7s QW o` SEAL a BY Steven P. Anderson, Sr. Vice President or Washington International Insurance Company & "- Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 10 day of May 2002 North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of DuPage ss: 10 day of May ,20 02 , before me, a Notary Public, personally appeared Paul D. Amstutz President and CEO of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Steven P. Anderson Sr. Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of, and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of, their respective companies. - OFFCIA— i SEq� VASWN A PATEL NWAIW Puma Q. RATa of jaLsNo n Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public I, James A. Carpenter , Vice President & Assistant Secretary of Washington International Insurance Company and the Assistant Secretary of North American Speciality Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 30tWay of October 12002 James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secretary or Washington International Insurance Company & Assistant Secretary of North American Speciality Insurance Company -3 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. S-901 3614 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) W .*+Wardroup & ssoci tes zz c. ,. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (f ereinalter ca�led1he Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Company (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Suretndreynn(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of P, g�rh P�Pn i t �ue j fRBollars ($293, 824.00 }lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated thel2thday of December , 20 02 to Bid #233-02/RS - Construction of Safety Measures at various City Facilities & City Secretary Office Renovations and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. ' NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 7 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 2th k, day of December , 20 02 . Washin n Inta-rnatiogal Insurance Company Wardroup & Associates. Inc. Surety (Company Name) By. By. ( itle) Cara D. Hancock, Attorney -In -Fact (Printed Name) ..•4 (Signature) (Title) FM 1, The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby ^ designates Kevin J . Dunnan agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Washington International Insurance Surety Compan By itle} Cara D. Hancock, Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to Form City of Lubbock — By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to'sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 _. NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin Dunn, Cara D. Hancock, Fred Davis and Harold D. Binggeli jointly or severally Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings re obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 20 of March, 2000: I**+ "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is +rae FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." \\mlpllillrylNll�� /�/�� /\J -nssrnrrnryl .. . � ci_GpAPOR,�t.Gt'�F Ygg - BY ='b: i3O oribATr � . SEAL m Paul D. Amstutz, President & Chief Executive Officer of Washington International Insurance Company & : con L ` yW ;ti, 1973 roin � Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company � SEAL ..�� �Jy a 's tdni�tA lime %y'' ?:�'� �� .............. N i lei \\�J �, �• - _ �glNi/111161p\U\\ BY Steven P. Anderson, Executive Vice President of washington International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 14 day of November , 20 02 North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois lMrr County of Du Page SS: On this 14 day of November 2002 before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Paul D. Amstutz President and CEO of Washington Intemational Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Steven P. Anderson Executive Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. low .� Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public ►le �+s•resrroa+setc I, James A. Can2enter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington P Intemational Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 20 day of December 20 02, James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secretary of Washington International Durance Company & Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company PAYMENT BOND P" r� STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) •^ OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Wardroup & Associates, Inc (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Company ,.., (hereinafter called the Sure (s), as Sure!YY(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount ofw h nd ed n'net tree h #dollars ($ 293.824.00) lawful money of the United States for the paymenf whereof, the said Principal and Sure y bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12th day of December ,20 02 ,to Bid #233-02/RS - Construction of Safety Measures at Various City Facilities & City Secretary offire Renovations and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and .material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 20th day of December 20 02 . Washington International Insurance Company Surety By �Af— (Title) Cara Ha cock, Attorney -In -Fact Wardroup & Associates, Inc. (Company Name) (Title) 6@ 1 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Kevin J. Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Washington International Insurance Surety Compa itle) Cara D. Hancock, Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. r 2 NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin Dunn, Cara D. Hancock, Fred Davis and Harold D. Binggeli jointly or severally Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS saw This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 20 of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." \`\p0�GtAt1 rY% Orj�i f/ U r,,�RPOA;iT.G ByCOR ; PORATE SFAL : O 9 Paul D. Amstutz, President & Chief Executive officer of Washington International Insurance Company & _ t�st'.Ty 1973 Qvr tj` Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company =a SEAL r' By - Steven P. Anderson, Executive Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company - IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 14 jay of November 2002 North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Du Page ss: On this 14 day of November 20 02 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Paul D. Amstutz President and CEO of Washington Intemational Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Steven P. Anderson Executive Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. ttowt.rtat�,see� � Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public I, James A. Carpenter the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct co of a Power of Attorney given b said North Y f3' g g PY Y g Y American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. Omit IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 20 day of December , 20 02. James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secretary of Washington Intemational Insurance Company & .Own Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company rA. IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. No Text DEC.27 '02 (FRI) 10.56 GALLAGHER INWEST 806 785 2155 PAGE-2/3 A=&X CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 12/19 PRODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 78S-21SS THIS CIRTIFUNE 1818SUEp AS A NATTER OF INFORMATION Gallagher Inwest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE r' HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P.O. Box 53910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock. TX 79453-3910 INSURER8 AFFORDING COVERAGE !^" INSURED Wirdroup & Associates, Inc. INMWRA: Mid -Continent Casualty Company P.O. Box 6999 WSum& Ok ahoma Surety Company Lubbock. TX 79493 INSURERC: Texas Mutual Insurance Company +Iw mm Ix Fi reman Is Fun McGee Insurance s, IN ANM 11 COVERAGES " THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWIiNSTANC ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR a MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCROW HEREIN 18 SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDMOM OFSUI POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAW. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUVENt %Mrm. UIRS GENERALU"WT D4GL000093979 10/02/2002 10/01/2003 EACNoccuRwax S 1 k X COMMERCI&GENER&LAINLITY FIRE DAMAGE (Mlralslb) i CLAM MADE D OCCUR MED aw VIM am PMMM) ii A PERSONAL a ADV NUURY S 1 GENERAL AOGRIMTE a 2 rAN%AQMOATE LINNT APPLIES PER: PWXK= a • COMP/OP AW s 2 POLICY M W M Lac v: . AUTOMMILEU481m X ANYwro DSTX000023396 10 0112002 10/01/2003 COMatNEDoNMELIMIT tEa.aad«u1 t 1 DWLYINJURY rw B ALL OWM AUTOS SCHEOULEDArTOs. X HIRED AUTOS x NON41NNED AUTOS LURY S =PW8=rMAW: OARAaF11Aea.TIY MlTOONLY- EAACCIDENT S CMlERTHAN lAAOII AUTO ONLY: Aaa s AWAUTO S ER aw LMany EArN OCCURRENCE i OCCUR Q CLAIMS MAD£ AOORMTE i i E i jRRUMMICN S g C woslceRacoMPr.NSATION>1ND k71PLOYlItS' LIABWTY F0001109539 10/01/2001 10/OIV2003 X „as I.L EACH ACCIDFM S E.L,OISEASE-EAElAPL.pY i E.L. DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT i �D71 re 41W r#9 Ifr?.wocLO"D" ►tsADDr� 'mn oa �INIu styINeCa ur s Various Locations ct Number If9 93.si07.10000-onstrueton o Secur :4d Insured included on General & Auto Liability policies in favor of certifcate holder as quired by written contract. Waiver of subrogation in favor of the certificate holder on workers ealpensation. general liability and automobile as required by written contract. CERTIFICATE HOLDER ADaTE>r+ALEIsu CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ATM: VICTOR KILMAN 162S 13TH STREET, ROOM L-04 tUBBOCK. TX 79401 MIR L.ETTMR: GANGELLATION SHOULD ANY OFTIM ACO'Vi OU7CRIpBD POLICIES 9E CANCELLBp 0lFOAE THE. EIIPIRATIMI DATE THEREOF. THE NSUINO COMPANY WR. W OIAVOR TO II" 20 DAYS WRfTiGN MOTN;E TO THE cERflFICATE NOLOER NASA 7D 7i1[ LMT, OUT FAE.NRIt T'0 NIAR. a11CH NOTE:E !MALL MiPOaE NO OYUGATION OR LMH1f.ITY "�," ACORD 2M (T DEC. 27 ' 02 (FRI) 10:57 GALLAGHER INWEST 806 785 2155 PAGE.9/3 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the pollcy(les) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endomement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terns and conditions of the policy, certain policies rrmy require an endorsement A statement on thts certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endomement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the Issuing tnsurer(e), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does It of r naativvely or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. M F ACORD 2S4 (71e7) ACORD,u CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE i2/19/2o 2 3RODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 Gallagher Inwest P.O. Box 53910 Lubbock, TX 79453-3910 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NSURED Wardroup & Associates, Inc. P.O. Box 6999 Lubbock, TX 79493 INSURER A. Mid -Continent Casualty Company INSURER B: Oklahoma Surety Company INSURER C: Texas Mutual Insurance Company INSURER D: Fi reman's Fund McGee Insurance INSURER E: OVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR L MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. JSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/DD POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MWDD/Y LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY 04GL000093979 10/01/2002 10/01/2003 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00( FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,00( X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE a OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL& ADV INJURY $ 1,000,00 LA GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,00( GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY PRO LOC JECT AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO 06TX000023396 10/01/2002 10/01/2003 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per Person) $ B ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ L_� ANY AUTO $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ LDEDUCTIBLE $ $ RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND TSF0001109539 10/01/2002 10/01/2003 X TORY LIMITS ER LC EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 OTHER XI97703096 10/01/2002 10/01/2003 D DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS roject Number #9193.8107.10000 - Construction of Security Measures Various Locations dditional Insured included on General & Auto Liability policies in favor of certifcate holder as equired by written contract. TIFICATE HOLDER ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ATTN: VICTOR KILMAN 1625 13TH STREET, ROOM L-04 LUBBOCK, TX 79401 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ; y; Ron Stroman. CIC/DAA ACORD PM IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it (' affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (7/97) an _ REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ 3 No Text CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 12t' day of December, 2002 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Wardroup & Associates, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #233-021RS - CONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY MEASURES AT VARIOUS CITY FACILITIES & CITY SECRETARY OFFICE RENOVATIONS - $293,824.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. z-7 ATTEST: City Secretary ' 'r e._ r, rs APPROVED AS TO FORM: _ Gr s i Attorney PM + ATTEST: Corporate Sec etary CONTRACTOR: 50V1-1 TF-, a , -$ fit.. PRINTED NAME: DENNIS w . MARDROUP PRE8 . TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Wardroup & Associates, Inc. ~- - 4408 Brownfield Drive - Lubbock,Texas 79410 No Text GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE • Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 0 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless �^ 1 I Y otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall .*+ accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades own will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from v+ time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE .� The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. ,., The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the "^ work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and bome by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 3 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. _ 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents,, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 4 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS ar•+ The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either ' before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. F , If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of r*work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK ` The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, OW alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative op" when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: 4 Method (A) - Method (B) - Method (C) - N By agreed unit prices; or By agreed lump sum; or If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost.- N 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later, than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the — Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or.equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to tranpact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any -- manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, 6 are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The Certificates of Insurance furnished by the Contractor and Subcontractors shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured. If no subcontractors will be used, said insurance certificate shall be accompanied by a written statement from the Contractor stating to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $0 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and ,, Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job P c, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. 7 D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract Deice, (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of 10 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the — Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 0406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from,each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services ' on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; "^ (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the -coverage period, a new certificate of - coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of !"" the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the ,u Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance rR 9 G Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurancepolicy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. _ The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing — coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 10 N r (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation k insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Cal/ the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or' providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' ^^ compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; _ (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (I)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless -- against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the`contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, 12 m the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. .,, 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. ,,,, 13 The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that _ it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way — encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the _ Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. _ 14 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth.in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial ,�•. payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare,a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be ,�. retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's �., Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final +�* completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, ,��„ 15 Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final _ completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's — Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. 16 .A, After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be'so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over * to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. �,, 17 The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect toss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. -- 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25.000. Al bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions — conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual — obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP — The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus _ materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS — Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same 18 a+ E' may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. ., In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 No Text RE: RESOLUTION NO.6262, ITEM NO.39, APRIL 8, 1999 - EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 6.25 Asbestos Worker 9.00 Asbestos Supervisor 12.50 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 7.00 Cement Finisher 8.00 Drywall Hanger 11.00 Electrician 13.75 Electrician -Helper 7.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.50 n Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 9.50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 Iron Worker 11.00 Laborer -General 6.00 Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 Sheet Metal Worker 10.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 7.00 a , Welder -Certified 11.00 1 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 2 EXHIBIT C -, Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. �+ 3 No Text P^ -........-PROJECT MANUAL r*. FACILITIES SECURITY PROJECT CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS a LAN DRESS ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1720 AVE. M LUBBOCK, TEXAS EXPIRES 02/28/03 ,��RE° ARcy August 14, 2002 Ce r^ -4 S] 6.20 9TF ��P a . t Coo aim FACILITIES SECURITY PROJECT CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS h FACILITIES SECURITY PROJECT LANDRESS ARCHITECTURE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS EXPIRES 02/28/03 tiD AR�y tr y —4 6120 T�r0F�E TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS: DIVISION TITLE PAGES DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 - Summary of Work----------------�._�__ 01019 - Contract Considerations ----------------------- ------------- ------ --------1 thru 2 01039 - Coordination and Meetings -- ----- —------------ — ----- _—____________________ 1 thru 5 01100 - Alternates---____-----------------------------_—______ _-------1 01300 - Submittals1 thru 4 01400 - Quality Control -------- ----__1 thru 2 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls-----_--_______ ----- 1 thru 4 01600 - Material and Equipment-----------------------------------------------1 thru 2 01700 - Contract Closeout ----- 1 thru 3 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK - NOT USED 4-- DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03251 - Semi -Rigid Expoxy Joint Filler --- -------- ---__— --------- 1 thru 4 "^ 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete------------------1 thru 11 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY - NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 - Metal Fabrications —----- —--- --_—----- -------- ___—_-_________ 1 thru 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing ------------------- -------- -----------------1 thru 3 06410 - Custom Millwork---------------------- --- --- 1 thru 6 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ..� 07900 - Joint Sealers---------------------------------------------------1 thru 4 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08115 - Custom Steel Frames----------------------------------------------------1 thru 3 08305 - Access Doors ------- —------- -------------------------------------------1 thru 2 DATechnical Specs10201city securitylSPECINDX.doc „.� 08341 - Overhead Coiling Grilles ----__--_------ — ----------------- --__-----_-1 thru 4 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts------------------------------_---1 thru 8 08710 - Door Hardware------------------ -------- -------------------------- -------1 thru 11 08721 - Automatic Sliding Entrance/Exit Doors----- thru 8 08800 - Glazing ------------ —----------- —------ --------- -- --- -------- ----------- --1 thru 6 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems ---- ------------ —-------------------- ----- __---_1 thru 6 09400 - Terrazzo —_ ---- w--------------- —w_ 1 thru 3 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ----------- ---- ____ ----- �_�____—____M_ 1 thru 4 09650 - Resilient Flooring --------------- —------- _---- w_______________________1 thru 5 09900 - Painting and Finishing--------- -------- ----------- ------------ —---- --------1 thru 7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS AND SEATING �* - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13710 - Perimeter Security1 thru 19 13720 - Intrusion Detection — ------------ ------- --------------------------- 1 thru 16 o- 13760 - Video Surveillance---------------------------- ----------------1 thru 15 F DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods-----------------------------1 thru 7 15060 - Hangers and Supports--------_—_w______________ ----- ____----- ---1 thru 7 15081 - Duct Insulation ------- ------- -------------_---------------------------1 thru 3 15083 - Pipe Insulation — --- ----------- ------- —------- ---------------------------1 thru 3 15181 - Hydronic Piping thru 6 15763 - Fan Coil Units ------- ---------- -------------- -------------------------1 thru 4 15815 - Metal Ducts — ------ thru 4 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles------------ ----- --------- --------1 thru 3 15861 - Air Filters --- —------ -------------__----------------------------- ------1 thru 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods------------------------------ 1 thru 4 16060 - Grounding and Bonding ---- —---- —-------- --- —-------------- ------- — --- --1 thru 2 16120 - Conductors and Cables ------- --------------- --------------- —----- -----------1 thru 2 16130 - Raceways and Boxes ------- ---------------------------------------- —1 thru 6 16140 - Wiring Devices ------------------------------------------ ---------------1 thru 2 16442 - Panelboards---- —--- ------------- —------------- ---- --------- —--------- -- ----- 1 thru 4 16511 - Interior Lighting ---------------- --- ---------- ------------ ------ ------------ 1 thru 3 DATechnical Specs10201city security\SPECINDX.doc Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01010 ram+ SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work by Owner and Owner occupancy. B. Owner supplied products. C. Contractor use of site and premises. 1.2 CONTRACT DESIGN A. Contract Description without force and effect: The work consists of general construction including plumbing, mechanical and electrical work. Primarily, the project consists of enclosing the east portico of the Municipal Building at 1625 Thirteenth Street, adding security screening, surveillance video and card access system for n personnel. The project additionally includes work at various city owned facilities as indicated on the drawings. +* 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Access to Site B. Emergency Building Exits During Construction C. Construction Operations E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Notify the Owner 48 hours in advance of any required outages. 1.4 ACCESSIBILITY A. This project is subject to and the contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 0" END OF SECTION A SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01010 Page 1 .M. - Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Inspecting and testing B. Schedule of values s� C. Application for payment D. Change procedures 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and options. 1.3 INSPECTING AND TESTING COSTS A. Costs Included in the Contract Sum: 1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document ` requirements. 3. Costs of re -testing upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect/Engineer. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will not be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values with list of subcontractors in duplicate within 7 days after date of receipt of Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. ' D. f Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances, if any, specified in this section. E. Include separately, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: Monthly D. Include forms required by Owner. i CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS Section 01019 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES 0201 A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1987 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request Notice of Change that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. E. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. F. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. G. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS Section 01019 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 s. SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or ems, contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to f this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES t, A. Coordination. B. Pre -construction meeting. C. Site mobilization meeting. �., D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. �., F. Examination. G. Preparation. H. Cutting and Patching. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. Verify installed system will be integrated and 00" operational prior to use. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically in Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the z construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial a•► Completion. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of activities. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 1 i Facilities Security Project 0201 1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING - A. Confirm drawing dimensions and roof penetrations. 1.4 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Intent to Award. B. Attendance Required: Architect and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, Products, values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required: Architect, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Procedures for testing. _. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum semimonthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Architect as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 2. Review of Work progress. .� 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13.Otherbusiness relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre -installation meeting at the site two weeks prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. r*+ D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: r 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in Product sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition. E. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 3 Fe Facilities Security Project 0201 match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect/Engineer for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition; to Architect for review. _ I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product sections. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces, especially floor slabs scheduled to receive new flooring, are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location prior to installing new work. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affect: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. — 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. PM F. Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. "'"' H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION �n COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 !r"*" SECTION 01100 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall submit with his bid, alternate proposal stating the difference in price (additions or deductions) from the total estimate for adding or changing the following materials or construction from that shown on the Drawings and specified. B. The difference in prices shall include all omissions, additions, and adjustments of all trades as may be necessary because of each change, substitution or omission. C. All work and materials required by alternates shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of the specifications. D. Failure to submit alternate amounts in spaces provided on Proposal shall be basis for disqualification of bid. 1.2 ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 If Alternate No. 1 is accepted, the Contractor shall provide the new east entrance at the Municipal Building as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION F_ ALTERNATES Section 01100 Page 1 Pa'9 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures B. Construction progress schedules i C. Proposed Products list D. Product Data E. Shop Drawings F. Samples t: G. Design data H. Test reports I. Certificates J. Manufacturer's instructions K. Manufacturer's field reports L. Erection drawings 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS E A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranties, bonds, manufacturers' certificates, and closeout submittals. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and r specification section number, as appropriate. SUBMITTALS ,,, Section 01300 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data for Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. B. Product Data for Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator. C. Product Data for Project Close-out: -- 1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion. D. Submit the number of copies that the Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by the Architect. E. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. F. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. G. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings for Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 2 V, Facilities Security Project 0201 2. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. ?" B. Shop Drawings for Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. C. Shop Drawings for Project Close-out: 1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion. D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. - E. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and two opaque reproductions. 1.6 SAMPLES A. Samples For Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. B. Samples For Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator. C. Samples For Selection: 1. Submitted to Architect for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect selection. 3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. G. Reviewed samples that may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. H. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in the specification section. 1.7 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 3 OR% Facilities Security Project 1.8 TEST REPORTS 0201 A. Submit for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.9 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to owner in quantities — specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. — C. Refer to Section 01400 - Quality Control, Manufacturers' Field Services article. 1.11 ERECTION DRAWINGS A. Submit drawings for the Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for the Owner. B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by the Architect or — Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 4 OW Facilities Security Project 0201 ! SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 7 PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance - control of installation. B. Tolerances C. References. D. Inspecting and testing laboratory services. r� E. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE -CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and !^ - workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.4 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.5 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, r comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. QUALITY CONTROL Section 01400 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by code. C. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.6 INSPECTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Contractor will employ services of an independent firm to perform inspecting and testing. Contractor shall include said services as a part of his/her bid. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections. —' C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm directly to the Architect and Contractor, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Testing or inspecting does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements. F. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL Section 01400 Page 2 ARM Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary - - facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, dust and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Cost: Contractor must verify and make all temporary connections. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Owner will pay cost of energy used for construction purposes. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Provide temporary power transformers, switchgear, wiring and other devices as required to support continuing store operations. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at the site. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. C. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required by the contractor's operations. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location feeder switch at source distribution equipment. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. Outlets damaged by contractors use shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 150 sq. ft. (46 sq. m) of active work area. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/ sq ft. (21 watt/sq. m) but no less than that required by OSHA. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft. (10.8 watt/ sq. m) lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq. ft. (2.5 watt/sq. m) H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.5 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Article 1.14 - Exterior Enclosures in this section. C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Prevent transmission of dust, fumes, odors, vapors or gasses into the store operating areas. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. General contractor will pay for own service. 1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. B. General contractor will pay for own service. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 2 _. 0" Facilities Security Project 0201 1.11 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.12 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working e� conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and existing work to remain and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Failure to take reasonable protective measures shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Damages resulting from improper care shall be corrected by the contractor at no cost to the Owner. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.14 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.15 DUST CONTROL A. Provide dust control dampening of exposed topsoil at intervals of not less than once each week. Additional dampening shall be performed when EPA limits for airborne dust particles are exceeded, or if dust levels impact store operations. B. Discontinue dust control when paving and landscape materials are in place. 1.16 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site. E. Open free -fall chutes not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 ft. (600 mm). Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 4 e� Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01600 t MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT_' PART1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications ` incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products B. Transportation and handling C. Storage and protection s*� D. Product options E. Substitutions 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01400 -,Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. e^ B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture, for components being replaced. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. Immediately remove from site any products that do not conform to the contract documents. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect product's in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide bonded off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of product. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The general provision of the contract specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 Page 2 ^- Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL x Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Project record documents. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Warranties. F. Spare parts and maintenance materials. k 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. t" 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ram, A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architects review. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. .� D. Owner will occupy all portions of the building as specified in Section 01010. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean site; sweep paved areas. E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. ** 1.5 ADJUSTING a _ A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. +"* 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each applicable item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Remove Architect title block and professional seal from all documents. H. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, typed on 24 pound white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major material suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a) Significant design criteria. _ b) List of equipment. c) Parts list for each component. d) Operating instructions. e) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: _ a) Shop drawings and product data. b) Air and water balance reports. c) Certificates. d) Photocopies of warranties and bonds. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page 2 .� Facilities Security Project 0201 '^ E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection. k, 1.8 WARRANTIES '""k A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, m„ C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three °D° side ring binder with durable plastic cover. ?" D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1+-e PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ems+ CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page 3 '^ Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 03251 SEMI -RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER .w PART 1 GENERAL: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation and application of semi -rigid epoxy joint filler materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES ,., A. ASTM C882 - Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems Used with Concrete. B. ASTM D638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. !^ C. ASTM D695 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. D. ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. E. ASTM D695 - Test for Compressive Yield F. ASTM D4541 — Test for Adhesion to Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Indicate product standards, physical and chemical characteristics, technical specifications, limitations, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations regarding each material. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that specified products and procedures meet or exceed specified requirements. r 1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures. B. Accurately record actual locations of joints obscured by all floor covering material. SEMI RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER Section 03251 Page 1 0 Facilities Security Project 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0201 A. Pre -installation Inspection: It shall be the responsibility of the installer to survey the project prior to the onset of work, and bring all significant slab or joint deficiencies to the attention of the general _ contractor. Filling and/or correction of all minor edge spalls shall be considered part of the installer's contract. B. Materials Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Sample Installation: As part of the installer's contract he shall install a 20' sample installation for both control and construction joints. The sample installation shall depict both the joint preparation — and filling procedure that will be used for the entire work. Once accepted, these procedures and the finished samples shall be held as the standard for the project. D. Applicator: Company specializing in semi -rigid epoxy joint filler with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. E. Testing: Upon completion of work the installer shall have an EXXCEL representative inspect all work. The representative shall perform random cores by drilling through the semi -rigid epoxy joint filler. Should the coring reveal less -than -specified filler depth, the installer shall remove and properly refill all joints that are proven to be, or suspected to be unacceptable. Said work shall be done at the installer's expense. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01400 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Comply with instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metzger/McGuire MM-80 2. Pecora EP 800 3. Prime Resins 5000 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400 2.2 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Epoxy Resin: Two part epoxy adhesive containing 100 percent solids, meeting the following minimum characteristics: Characteristic Test Method Results 1. Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D4541 250-285 psi 2. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 400-500 psi 3. Elongation ASTM D638 20-24% 4. Compressive Yield Strength ASTM D695 1500-1550 psi 5. Shore D Hardness - 45-55 6. Shore A Hardness - 80-90 SEMI RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER Section 03251 Page 2 eA* Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. C. Sand: ASTM C404; uniformly graded, clean. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Cleaning Agent: Commercial muriatic acid of diluted strength that will not mar the finish. 2.3 MIXING EPDXY JOINT FILLER A. Mix epoxy fillers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended. B. Mix components in clean equipment or containers. Conform to pot life and workability limits. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of slab. Installation of semi -rigid epoxy joint filler shall be deferred as long as possible to permit maximum pre -filling slab shrinkage. in no case will semi- rigid epoxy joint filler be installed when the slab has less than 28 days cure. Do Not apply until slab hardener is in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Joint Preparation: Joints shall be cleared of all debris and saw laitance using mechanical means (dry cut re -sawing, high pressure water blasting, sand blasting, etc) suitable to the general contractor. Both sides of all joints shall be free of any and all saw laitance and sealers, coatings or m, curing compounds, ensuring that semi -rigid epoxy joint filler bonds directly to bare concrete. The installer shall have a representative of the GC inspect all joint preparation, paying close attention to side walls, prior to the start of actual filling. + B. Filler Depth: All saw cut joints shall be filled to their full depth or 2" minimum. If cuts are deeper k than 2", the installer may use silica sand or backer rod to fill the space below the 2 inch semi -rigid epoxy joint filler depth. If construction joints are not saw -cut, and extend the full depth of the slab, the installer shall fill with semi -rigid epoxy joint filler to a minimum depth of 2". C. Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports; no deeper than the depth of the crack to be filled or port size diameter no greater than the thickness of the crack. Provide temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent leakage of adhesive. 3.3 APPLICATION — SEMI -RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER A. The installer will be allowed to choke -off the bottom of saw -cuts in one of the three following means: 1. Place a layer of dry silica sand at the base of the cut, to a maximum depth of 1/4-INCH from the bottom of the joint. 2. Insert a non -compressible rod, such as a Metzger/McGuires Spal-Pro Rod at the base of M the joint. 3. Modify the first pass of Semi -rigid Epoxy Joint Filler by adding no more than one cup of silica sand to the pre -mixed Semi -rigid Epoxy Joint Filler. SEMI RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER Section 03261 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Installation shall be done using a two -pass method, with the first pass recessed at least 1/2-inch deep. The second pass shall be made within one hour of the first pass to ensure complete chemical interlock between the material. (Refer to published instruction sheets for full information on mixing and safety requirements.) C. The second pass shall be performed leaving the semi -rigid epoxy joint filler in a crowned profile that cures above the floor surface. Allow the semi -rigid epoxy joint filler to cure (6-8 hrs) into a solid, then shave flush using a razor. If the semi -rigid epoxy joint filler reveals ratchet marks from the shaving heat may be applied to facilitate smoother shaving. The finished profile of the semi- rigid epoxy joint filler shall be flush with the floor surface. Should any filler surfaces be concave, the top 1/2-inch of semi -rigid epoxy joint filler shall be removed by sawing and replaced. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Field inspection and testing. B. Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work. END OF SECTION SEMI RIGID EPDXY JOINT FILLER Section 03251 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or ., contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK e A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301-89 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI304R-89 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 3. ACI 311-81 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318-89 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 5. ACI 347R-88 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard r. Practice." B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory subject to the approval of the Architect. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. «» 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by the Architect. D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing laboratory acceptable to the Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. r 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation .�» instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, - as requested by the Architect. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315-88 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good as new". B. Use plywood complying with US Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood: Class 1, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable materials. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Corrugated Steel Forms: Shall be formed from galvanized sheets of gauge and properties as shown on the drawings. E. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the Drawings. w 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615-90, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185-90A, welded steel wire fabric. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675M-90a, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499-89. D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150-89, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Cleans sharpy natural sand free from loam cla lumps or other deleterious substances. __.. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not accepts le. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 2 t Facilities Security Project 0201 PON C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33-90. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter es follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one- third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb ++ or voids. D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260-86. F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494-90, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494-90, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect. C 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS r+ A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded can fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2—thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections: ++ C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171 R-86. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. 'Polyethylene -coated burlap. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable "~ provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192-90a and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39-86, specified in ACI 301-89. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301-89. Strength date for established •, standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified :_ _ ....: r�ras st.at lest:aece atats.ia�...cr or the -16 r . 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 4137 kPa or if no suitable records are available, select CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 proportions to produce an average strength of at least 8274 kPa greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214-89 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. — C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete will the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28 day compressive strength; WIC ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Architect when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50❑ F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2" - 3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirement of ASTM C 94-90, and as herein specified. B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for materials with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than afed in ASTM C 94 90 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 850 F. and 900 F. reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 112 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 900 F. reduce the mixing and CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION i`- 3.1 FORMS P" A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. �. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to castmin-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where striping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Chamfer exposed comers and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing R- such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt and other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. ., 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, 0... space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed �- concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 3" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable.. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in x either direction. 3.3 JOINTS ' A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. anO 4PAwepf1 walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 reinforcement across construction joints. B. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as shown on the Drawings. Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops during the progress of the work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Protect waterstop material from damage where it protrudes from any point. C. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in stabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304-R89, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re- handling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. ws- n,a . K Oortlidate Wtecete; �arricaFibratfit + tp#e,eted �,v Band spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 6 a Facilities Security Project 0201 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: *, 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete` during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. s� E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which should be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 400 F. uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 500 F, and not more than 800 F, at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. a - - 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACl 305R-89 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 900 F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment " in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as - cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. s+ 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces rye occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent ,.fwmed -sift t onnue IA surke& tf eativmnt Gf fwm"-surf-uriifdrmily.zrmross, addjacent_ unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 7 Facilities Security Project 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHED 0201 A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plan tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Non -Slip Broom Finish: — 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. - 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50❑ F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. - B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water - fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width #with Tsides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 8 Facilities Security Project 0201 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon a final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. ..,, C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1' Final sure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls columns, and similar. parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 500 F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged from facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound !�*+ material to concrete contract form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to the Architect. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A Patching Defective Areas epa ri anpaicii ceective areas with cement mortarmmedaey ate removal oto�ms dui """ only whennacceptable to the Architect CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 9 Facilities Security Project 0201 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patch with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. _ 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4: clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by the Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the Architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 1 .. _ v. T i t _ontraci r_G ►aJl.;'fnp�ny..:; ,-testing.,fr r?tnru,::xoe:_ e�rfS rtl. a!l,:a#hK,:tPsts l,,J , submit rest reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 10 t, Facilities Security Project 0201 I as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172-90, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94-90. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143-90a; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 173-78, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 400 F. and below, and when 800 F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31-90; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39-86; one set for each 76 cubic meters or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 465d square meters of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 38 cubic meters, the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day test D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION r CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 11 r-, Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. B. Shop fabricated aluminum items. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. B. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions r+ and Panels. d C. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. G. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. H. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zino -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. J. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. r*� K. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. L. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. M. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. N. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. O. ASTM B26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings. re* P. ASTM B85 - Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings. Q. ASTM B177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 1 s-, t; Facilities Security Project 0201 R. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. S. ASTM B210 - Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. T. ASTM B211 - Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. U. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. V. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. W. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. X. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and — type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A32 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. 1. Gratings: ANSI A202.1, Type B. _ 2.2 MATERIALS -ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5. —. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 2 P" Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209. C. Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. D. Aluminum -Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM B26. F. Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings: ASTM B85. G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, galvanized to ASTM A153. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. ems, B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal jointed members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related ,., components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs and landings and railing to each other and to building structure. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). J. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches (3 mm in 1200 mm). E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches (1.5 mm in 1 200 mm). 2.5 FINISHES - STEEL _ A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. s-+ B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one coat. e+A D. Chrome Plating: ASTM B177, nickel -chromium alloy, satin finish. 2.6 FINISHES - ALUMINUM A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603.8 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized, prepared with a mechanical M pre-treatment, anodized to clear color. C. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized, prepared with a mechanical M pre-treatment, anodized to clear color. D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS A. Steel Guard Posts: 6 inches diameter standard steel pipe as detailed on Drawings. Fill pipe with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. "- 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Provide anchors, required for connecting railings to structure. Anchor railing to structure. C. Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. J F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm) C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 114 inch (6 mm) END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 �^+ SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Blocking. B. Wood furring and grounds. C. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA: American Plywood Association. C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. F. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. G. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. H. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. I. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: RIS, SPIB, and WWPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing: West Coast Douglas Fir species, 15 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. C. Plywood: APA, Grade BC; Exposure Durability 1; sanded. WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Particleboard: Particleboard shall not be less than 45 pounds per cubic foot density, premium industrial grade 1-C-2 conforming to CS-236-66. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: — 1. Fasteners: Hot -dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt — type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT — A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): colored, type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. — C. Construct curb members of single pieces. D. Space framing and furring 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. F. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction. 3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT ` A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site -sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Dimension Lumber: _ 1. General: Where wood framing from 2" through 4" in nominal thickness is indicated, provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). 2. Dress dimension lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide kiln -dried dimension lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with KD size requirements of PS 20. Mark lumber "KD". WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 4. Boards: Southern pine: B & BTR Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. West Coast Douglas Fir: C Select Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. California Redwood: A Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. Rough sawn where noted or exposed to view. 5. Grounds and Nailers: Yellow Pine, No. 1 Grade, Kiln Dried. C. Plywood: 1. Exterior: a. Not exposed: APA, EXT, B-C, Group 1, of thickness noted on the drawings. b. Exposed to view: APA, EXT, A-C, Group 1, of thickness noted. 2. Interior: a. Not Exposed: APA, INT, B-D, Group 1. b. One Side Exposed: APA, INT, A-D, Group 1. C. Both Sides Exposed: APA, INT, A -A, Group 1. END OF SECTION �t WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 "+ SECTION 06410 CUSTOM MILLWORK PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing. F. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of cabinet exterior and interior. 1.3 REFERENCES "* A. ANSI A135A - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. C. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) - Quality Standards. D. BHMA All 56.9 - Cabinet Hardware. E. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. F. HPMA (Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association) HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. G. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. H. NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association). L PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. J. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 1 P% Facilities Security Project 0201 details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit two, 44 inch (100x100 mm) size samples, illustrating cabinet finish and door edges with hinges in position. E. Samples: Submit two 4x4 inch (100x100 mm) size samples, illustrating counter top finish and edges. F. Samples: Submit one sample of drawer pulls, hinges, and related items, illustrating hardware finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium quality. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MOCKUP A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for mock-up. B. Provide mockup of full size base cabinet and upper cabinet which includes plumbing accessories and fitments. C. Locate where directed. D. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed below set a standard of quality. Others shall provide full size samples prior to award of contract: 1. Woodmode Industries. 2. St. Charles L Series 3. Crystal Cabinetworks Compro Division 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 2 __ ems+ Facilities Security Project 0201 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI Premium; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: A" 1. Cabinet Frame: White Pine, Grade 1. 2. Exposed Stiles and Rails: White Pine, Grade 1. 3. Internal Construction: White Pine, Grade 11. B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI Premium; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: 1. Cabinet Frame: Red Oak, Grade 1 2. Exposed Stiles and Rails: Red Oak, Grade I 3. Internal Construction: Red'Oak, Grade 11 2.3 PANEL MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, MDF core materials, bonded with exterior resin to produce a water resistant product type of gluer recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: 1. Door and Drawer Fronts: Red Oak, Grade I . 2. Gables and Backs: Species' Red Oak, Grade B. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, standard tempered grade, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, smooth two sides, located as follows: 1 Drawer Bottoms 2. Gables and Backs 0" 2.4 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Manufacturers: 1. Wilsonart 2. Nevamar 3. Formica 4. Micarta 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.5 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE MATERIALS A. High Wear Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) General Purpose quality; scheduled color, ,.., solid woodgrain or pattern, and matte surface texture. Use this material on all horizontal working surfaces unless otherwise noted. B. Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.030 inch (0.8 mm) General Purpose quality; scheduled color, solid ,,.., woodgrain or pattern, and matte surface texture. Use this material on all vertical working surfaces unless otherwise noted. 2.6 SPECIALTY SURFACING A. Hardwood Lumber Surfacing: Graded in accordance with AWI Premium; Red Oak species, S4S sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; exposed edge grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. B. Wood Veneer Laminate: Hardwood plywood; HPMA HP Grade; Graded in accordance with AWI Premium; MDF core, type of glue recommended for application; Red Oak face species, plain sliced cut; of grain quality suitable for transparent finish. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by AWI laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; plated finish in concealed locations and satin finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Grommets: Rubber material for cut-outs. — 2.8 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Rests: Formed steel channels and rests, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch (25 mm) centers; satin finish. KV #255 standards, #256 supports,#260 hold downs. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum pull, satin finish. "U" shaped pull, steel with satin finish 4483 — Y2 x US10 Stanley color, 4 inch (100 mm) centers. — C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish to match balance of hardware by National, CCL 0737 x STR 2540 where indicated on the drawings. Master key cabinet lock. Provide 3 keys per lock. Furnish 6 master keys direct to Owner. D. Catches: Elbow Catch Ives 2F13 at pair of doors with locks. E. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating tracks, full extension type. KV 1300 extension slides. F. Hinges: Knuckle disappearing type, steel with satin finish. Grass 1200 DTS2 x Baseplate 1000 DTS2 x US26D. — G. Bumpers 3M # SJ-5012 adhesive mount. Use clear bumpers at transparent finish and grey bumpers at paint finishes. 2.9 WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES A. Fire Retardant (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 75 / 450 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Colored manufactured by Dricon. 2.10 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Shop brush apply wood materials requiring UL fire rating or preservatives to wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.11 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Stain, Varnish and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09900. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) matching hardwood matching edging. Use one piece for full length only. — C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. Plastic trim. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; reveal overlay style. CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs. G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. H. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) on center. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures, fittings, and computer cableways. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. 2.13 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and t of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only unless approved by the Architect. F E. Seal, stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi -concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. P^ F. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. r�+ E PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Glaze materials as specified in Section 08800. CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 5 l Facilities Security Project 0201 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout 01400 - Quality Control: Adjust installed work. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION CUSTOM MILLWORK Section 06410 Page 6 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to r this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and joint backing. ems+ 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames: Sealants required in conjunction with door frames. B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants required in conjunction with glazing methods. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. r-+ E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. R- G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open -Cell Foam). H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. C. Maintain one copy of document on site JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with -- minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. _ B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS -� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Sonneborne Division of Contec — B. Pecora Chemical Corp C. Tremco Mfg. Co. D. Bostik 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: A. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces of concrete and masonry; between concrete masonry and stone; between metal and concrete, mortar, masonry, or stone; interior and exterior perimeter joints of metal frames in exterior walls; and exterior overhead joints. 1. MULTI -PART NONSAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type M; Grade NS; class 25; Shore'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 500". b. Pecora "Dynatrol II". C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP 2". d. Tremco "Dymeric". OR _ 2. ONE -PART NONSAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type S; Grade NS; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 900". b. Pecora "Dynatrol I". C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP 1". d. Tremco "Dymonic'. B. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing exterior and interior joints in horizontal surfaces of concrete; between metal and concrete, mortar, stone, masonry and pavers. 1. MULTI -PART POURABLE POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type M; Grade P; class 25; — Shore'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 550". b. Momeco "Vulken 255". C. Tremco "THC-900". JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 2. ONE -PART POURABLE POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type S; Grade P; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 950". b. Pecora "Urexpan NR 201". i"1 - C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 1". C. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing interior joints in field -painted vertical and overhead surfaces at perimeter of door frames, gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete or masonry; and all other interior locations not indicated otherwise. 1. ACRYLIC -EMULSION SEALANT: Single -component, air curing; conforming to ASTM C835-76; nonstaining, nonbleeding. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 600". b. Pecora "AC 20". C. Sonneborn "Sonolac". d. Tremco'Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk". D. COLOR: To match adjacent surfaces. � 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. FRI B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION v 3.1 EXAMINATION ,., A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. 1 B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. .., 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. MR B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. �- D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. JOINT SEALERS h Section 07900 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 08115 CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel frames. B. Interior glazed light frames for bullet resistive glass. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI All 17.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A591 -Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated. D. ASTM Ell 52 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. F. HMMA 802 -Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. G. HMMA 820 - Hollow Metal Frames. H. HMMA 830 - Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. I. HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. J. HMMA 850 - Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. A+ K. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. L. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. M. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cut-outs for hardware, reinforcement. D. Samples: Submit two sample of frame, 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating factory CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 1 m Facilities Security Project 0201 finished frame colors and surface texture. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of HMMA 802, HMMA 820, HMMA 830, HMMA 840, HMMA 850, and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect frames with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ^ 2.1 FRAMES A. Steel: Galvanized sheet in accordance with ASTM A525. B. Interior Frames: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick material. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. - B. Primer: Zinc chromate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames to HMMA 802 and 820, style and configuration to suit re -used doors. CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 2 e.. Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Fabricate frames as welded unit. C. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. D. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches (1 200 mm) with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. E. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. F. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 2 inch (50 mm) head member. 2.4 FINISH A. Interior Units. ram+ B. Primer: Factory Applied. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with HMMA 840 DHI for hardware installation. B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured with straight edges, crossed comer to corner. END OF SECTION ww CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 3 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 '* SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access door and frame units. B. Wall, and ceiling locations. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board System: Openings in gypsum board partitions and ceilings. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. C. Section 15815 - Ductwork Accessories: Access doors in ductwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access units. C. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. W D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough -in dimensions. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations of all access units. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with UL requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code for fire rated access units. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. B. Coordinate the work with mechanical, electrical and refrigeration work requiring access units. ACCESS DOORS Section 08305 Page 1 e..s Facilities Security Project 0201 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - WALL UNITS A. "Access Panels" 1. Install panels: Larsen Milcor Williams Brothers Masonry TMS S WB-UAD B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FABRICATION - WALL UNITS A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 16 gage (1.5 mm) steel. B. Fabricate door panels of 14 gage (1.8 mm) steel single thickness stainless steel sheet. C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. D. Hardware: 1. Hinge: 175 degree steel piano hinge 2. Lock: Keyed 2.3 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer. B. Finish: One coat baked enamel, color to match adjacent surface. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION ACCESS DOORS Section 08305 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 08341 PART1 _ c� The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated'into _- ._- -_' of -- contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES - A. Coiling metal grilles and operating hardware; motor operated. � 12 RELATED SECTIONS . A. Section D550O—Metal Fabrications. B. Section OB71O—Door Hardware: Cylinder core and keys. C. Se��n1G13O—Condu�Cpndu��nme��ho��u�to0hUeoperator and f�xnghUeopenab�rho ` control station. 0 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. AGTMA4801A480M-General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. - B. ASTM A525/A525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. AGTMA52O/A528M-Steel Sheet, Zinc -coated (Golvonizad)hythe Hot -dip Process, Comnnxsn:ia| Quality, D. AGTMB189/B1GQM'Aluminum Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. E. ASTM B221/A2 1K8-Alumnummnd/Uuminum`Al|oyExtmdedBars.Rods.VWne.Shopen.ond Tubes. 1'4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ` A. Automatic unit with overhead counter balance device. _ B. Coiling Grille: Within oframed opening. C. Electric motor operated unit with monmdoverride incase ofpower failure. D. Coiling Grille: With aframed opening. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section O130O-Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details. Submit manufacturers product data and installation instructions for each type of security grille. Include both published data and any specific data preparedfor this project. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation - U i details. Submit shop drawing for approval prior tofabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. ������OVERHEAD����� 0 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Samples: Submit one grille member, 12 x 12" (300 mm x 300 mm) in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE — A. Manufacturer: Security grilles shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security grilles. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: Installation of security grilles shall be performed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide grilles, guides, motors, and related primary components from one manufacturer for each type of grille. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. D. Pre -Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre -installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. 1.8 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS _ A. Manufacturers: 1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 2. The Cookson Co. 3. Kinnear, Division of Harsco Corp. 4. Overhead Door Company 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Trade Reference: 671 Series Overhead Coiling Grilles by Overhead Door Corporation. B. Curtain: Horizontal 5/16 diameter rods with network of vertically interlocking links to form a pattern. Bottom bar shall be an extruded aluminum tubular shape. 1. Material: Galvanized Steel _ 2. Vertical Rod Spacing: 2" oc 3. Horizontal Link Spacing: 9 oc 4. Pattern: Straight lattice. C. Grille: 1. Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A526. 2. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion. OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Section 08341 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.3 FINISHES A. Components shall have the following finish. All non -galvanized, exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust inhibitive primer. 1. Galvanized steel: rust inhibitive primer. B. Guides and Hood Enclosure: Prefinished. Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A526. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Guides: Extruded aluminum shapes with retainer grooves with continuous PVC inserts to reduce noise and assist operation. B. Brackets: Minimum 3/16 steel to support barrel, counterbalance and hood. C. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 per foot of span. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. D. Hood: Galvanized steel, 24 gauge hood with intermediate supports as required. 2.5 OPERATION r,. A. Manual Operation on failure of automatic system: manual chain hoist. B. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per .. second. 1. Sensing Edge Protection: Pneumatic sensing edge. 2. Special Operation: Enter by vehicle detector operation, card reader control, entrance doors explosion and dust ignition proof control wiring., exit door by vehicle detector loop in pavement operation. 3. Operator Controls: Key override operated control station with open, close, and top buttons for surface mounting, interior location. 4. Emergency Egress Device: Interior flush mounted handle mechanism to automatically open " grille part way to permit passage even if power is not available. C. Locking: Cylinder lock for electric operation with interlock switch. D. Framing: Free standing tubular steel support frames. PART 3 EXECUTION Polk 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. ^* B. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B. Instruct Owners personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. D. Securely and rigidly brace components to structure. Secure guides to structural members only. E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Section 08341 Page 3 er Facilities Security Project 0201 F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07900. G. Install perimeter trim. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Tolerances. B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). E. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean grille and components. C. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Section 08341 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL—, Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Storefront Type 1 (4 112" x 1 3/4") for .25"A" glass with medium style aluminum doors. B. Aluminum Storefront Type II (4 1/2"x 2 1/4') Ribbon System for .25" and 1" glass. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal fabricated attachment devices. e B. Section 07g00 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 08710 -Finish Hardware: Cylinders s D. Section 08721 -Automatic Door Equipment. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. e B. AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. C. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls. ' D. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. E. AAMA 605.2 -Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. F. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for w Architectural Aluminum. G. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural_ Aluminum. H. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. ee-+ I. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. J. ANSI Al 17.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. K. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. ars L. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. M. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 N. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. O. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. P. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. Q. ANSIIASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. R. ANSI/ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. S. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — STOREFRONT TYPE I A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — STOREFRONT TYPE II / RIBBON SYSTEM: A. Provision for Thermal Movements 1. Ribbon window framing systems shall be designed to provide for thermal movement of all component materials resulting from surface at the project location without causing buckling, stresses on glass, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. Operating ' windows and doors shall function normally over this temperature range. B. Test Procedures and Performance 1. Air Infiltration Test a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283-84 at static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf. b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area. 2. Water Resistance Test a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E331-86. b. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage at a static test pressure of 10.00 psf. 3. Uniform Load Deflection Test a. Test in accordance with ASTM E330-84. b. The system shall be designed for wind pressure normal to the plane of the wall in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. C. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 of the clear span. 4. Uniform Load Structural Test a. Test in accordance with ASTM 330-84 at a pressure 1.5 times the design wind pressure in 1.05.B.3.b. 5. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF) a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1988. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than 58. 6. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1988. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than .58 BTU/hr/sf/degrees F. C. Warranties 1. Total Storefront / Ribbon System: a. The contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total storefront/ribbon system installation. This includes the framing, glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting _ system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. b. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the contractor at his expense during the warranty period. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 2 r� Facilities Security Project 0201 V% 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft (0.0003 cu m/s/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft (136.85 N/sq m). F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. G. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling r temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components. H. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. C. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details. D. Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) in size illustrating pre -finished aluminum surface, and glazing materials. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store r� Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual B. Conform to requirements of ANSI All 17.1. ^ 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years documented experience. 1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01039. '* ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 0201 A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10. C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) during and 48 hours after installation. 1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of adjacent components or materials. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified r requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Type I: EFCO S-402 (4.25" x 2") for .25" and 1" glazing. B. Type II: EFCO Thermal S-901: '/4" (6 mm) glazing where scheduled and, EFCO Thermal S-902: 1" (25 mm) glazing where scheduled C. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent Products. 1. Armarlite 2. Kawneer 3. United States Aluminum D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 MATERIALS— STOREFRONT TYPE II/ RIBBON A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and temper. B. Glass — See Section 08800. C. Dissimilar Metals 1. All dissimilar metals must be properly insulated to prevent galvanic action. D. Fasteners 1. All exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. E. Thermal Barrier 1. Barrier material shall be poured -in -place two part polyurethane. A nonstructural thermal barrier is unacceptable. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.3 FABRICATION — STOREFRONT TYPE II / RIBBON SYSTEM A. General 1. All aluminum frame extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .080". 2. Overall depth shall be 5'/4" max, 4 15/16" minimum. B. Framing 1. Framing system shall provide continuous head and sill channels spliced together with extruded aluminum sleeves as required for thermal expansion. 2. Sill member shall provide a continuous gutter for exterior weepage through baffled weep holes. Back portion of sill channel should provide a dry gutter for fastening to structure. Sealing of fasteners in not required. 3. Vertical mullions shall be captured into head and sill channels, without mechanical fastening to provide for metal expansion and building deflection. C. Glazing 1. System shall be designed for glazing as indicated on the drawings. All units shall be glazed with EPDM gasket on both exterior and interior. 2. Glass spacers shall be extruded silicone. 3. Vertical members shall have a channel into which temporary glass retaining clips are inserted. Temporary retaining clips shall facilitate gasket and glass spacer installation, and silicone weather sealing. 4. All materials that come in contact with the silicone should be tested for compatibility. Samples of aluminum vertical mullions should be submitted to the silicone manufacturer for adhesion evaluation. 2.4 FINISH — STOREFRONT TYPES I AND II A. Anodized 1. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum storefront/ribbon system and components to match the existing dark bronze. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. ew _ B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPS 20, zinc rich type. 2.6 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 1 3/4 x 4.5 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep -, drainage system. Frames for interior glazing need not to be thermally broken. Provide system equal t B. Doors: 3.5 inches (89 mm) thick, 3.5 inch (89 mm) wide top rail, 3.5 inch (89 mm) wide vertical �-- stiles, 6.5 inch (165 mm) wide bottom rail; beveled glazing stops. 2.7 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 of types shown on the drawings. 2.8 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900. 2.9 DOORS A. General 1. Major portions of the door section shall have .188" wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall have .050" wall thickness. { ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 5 r•" Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Entrance Doors Swing Type 2. Entrance Doors Door stiles shall be no less than 3.5 " width. 3. Door stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed reinforcement brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be deep penetration and fillet welded. 4. All doors shall have an adjusting mechanism in the top rail to provide for minor clearance adjustments. C. Door stops shall include pile weatherstripping. D. Glazing: All units shall be dry glazed with extruded pressure fitting aluminum glazing stops, and EPDM gasket. 2.10 DOOR HARDWARE A. Weather Stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. B. Hinges: 1.5 pair 4.5 x 4 (114 x 101 mm) ball bearing butt hinges. C. Push/Pull: Manufacturers Standard Ultraline 1"diameter stainless steel. D. Closer: Norton 1605 without Hold Open. E. Deadlatch/Retractable Strike: Specified in Section 08710. F. Cylinder Lock: Specified in Section 08700. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hinge hardware. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 2.12 FINISHES A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603.8 AAMA 605.2 AAMA 606.1 AAMA 607.1 AAMA 608.1. B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Anodized to clear color, to 0.0007 inch (0.018 mm) thickness. C. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Duranodic 313 Dark Bronze finish, Architectural Class 1 Anodic coating with integral color M21C22 A42, having a minimum coating thickness of 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) and a minimum coating weight of 27 mg. / 650 square mm (1 square inch). Use this finish for all aluminum work. D. Concealed Steel Items: Primed with iron oxide paint. E. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 6 Facilities Security Project . ; 0201 ^* PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION pow A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. r 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual ° B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. I. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08700 and 08721 for installation requirements. J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. K. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.3 INSTALLATION - STOREFRONT / RIBBON A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with Architect approved shop drawings and specifications. B. Storefront/ribbon system shall be erected to a straight, plumb and level condition, in proper alignment and relation to established line and grades. C. Furnish and apply sealing materials to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. D. Sealing materials specified shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction, and shall be applied only by mechanics specially trained of experienced in their use. All surfaces must be clean and free of foreign matter before applying sealing materials. Sealing compounds shall be tooled to fill the joint and provide a smooth finished surface. E. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 7 Facilities Security Project 0201 F. The general contractor shall protect the aluminum materials and finish against damage from construction activities and harmful substances. The general contractor shall remove any protective coatings as directed by the architect, and shall clean the aluminum surfaces as recommended for the type of finish applied. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft (1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Protect finished Work from damage. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 8 r.., Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE r*a PART 1 GENERAL Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, r contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Thresholds. C. Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06220 - Finish Carpentry: Cabinet hardware. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames. C. Section 08341 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Lockable coiling doors. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders. 1.3 REFERENCES ,., A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Challenged People. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute- Quality Standards. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. ' F. UL 106 - Fire Tests'of'Door Assemblies. G. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. r*e 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. Deliver templates and finish hardware to aluminum and glass door suppliers for fitting and installation. B. Submit under provisions of Section 01400 Schedules: Submit detailed finish hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01300, for Architect's approval. Schedule shall be complete, including type, manufacturer's name and number, and finish of each item required. A complete schedule of keying shall also be furnished. Do not order or deliver finish hardware until Architect has approved schedules. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. ram* D. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. E. Samples: Submit 1 sample of each item scheduled illustrating style, color, and finish. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 1 r Facilities Security Project 0201 Samples: Approved Samples may be incorporated into the Work. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's data on each item of hardware, including maintenance and installation instructions. Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H. Templates: Furnish templates to other trades as required for fabrication of hollow metal door and frames, aluminum and glass doors, or other items related to hardware. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all work required to complete the Finish Hardware installation indicated by the Contract Documents. Furnish all supplementary items necessary for proper installation and in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. B. Elimination of Architectural Barriers: Door hardware shall comply with the applicable requirements of The Americans with Disabilities Act. Door hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48" (1219 mm) above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five Ibf. Preferred designs include but are not limited to lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms, and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface may be made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to hazardous areas. 2. Door Closers: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. 3. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or 30" (750 mm) from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull latch. Forces shall be as follows: a. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 Ibf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 Ibf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials. b. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 exceeding five Ibf. r 4. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section. Installer shall show evidence of five years experience in the installation of grade 2 hardware. Provide a list of projects completed within the last two years with at least three references. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS r A. Conform to Uniform Building Code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specked and indicated. 1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE r A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01040. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING e-* A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. Include necessary instructions, templates, drawings and fasteners for proper installation. Include extra fasteners. C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. D. Coordinate hardware with other work. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. Deliver templates and finish hardware to aluminum and glass door suppliers for fitting and installation. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers. ^� DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700. B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each keyed group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. McKinney Products Co. 2. Cylinders and Locks: See Hardware Schedule 3. Exit/Panic Devices: a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. C. Sargent Manufacturing Co. d. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 4. Push/Pull Units: a. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security, Inc. b. HB Ives, A Harrow Co. C. Traingle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco) 5. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: a. HB Ives, A Harrow Co. b. Traingle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco) 6. Door Stripping and Seals: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 7. Thresholds: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 iP 2.3 GENERAL r A. Manufacturers Reference Numbers: Where items of hardware are specified by numbers of manufacturers, they are taken from the following catalogues: sn Russwin f Sargent Corbin Schlage Stanley Hager Von Duprin Trimco LCN Ives Trego Glynn Johnson Corporation And those noted �s B. Only items listed as equal will be accepted by the Architect. e� C. Hinges- Shall be Stanley/Hager - in type, size and weight listed in the hardware sets. Comparisons of either McKinney or Hager/Stanley will be accepted as equal. .., _ Item SpecifiedMfr. Allowable Equals Item Mfr. Item Mfr. Butts: FBB168 Stanley BB1168 Hager T4133786 McKinney FBB179 Stanley BB1279 Hager TB2714 McKinney F179 Stanley 1279 Hager T2714 McKinney FBB212 Stanley BB759 Hager TB792 McKinney 2060 Stanley 1250 Hager 1502 McKinney Butts: BB1168 Hager FBB168 Stanley T4133786 McKinney BB1279 Hager FBB179 Stanley TB2714 McKinney 1279 Hager F179 Stanley T2714 McKinney BB759 Hager FBB212 Stanley TB792 McKinney 1250 Hager 2060 Stanley 1502 McKinney Note: Where existing frames occur, it shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier to field measure hinge size and weight and to furnish hinges as required at these openings. D. Cylindrical Locks & Latches - Shall be as shown in the hardware sets. E. Mortise Locks - Shall be as shown in the hardware sets. F. Exit Devices - Shall by types and series as listed in hardware sets. Exit devices shall have manufacturer's 3 year warranty. Note: Vertical rod devices, if any, shall have latch retracting lever bottom latch with mortise strikes. G. Door Closers - Shall be types and series as shown in the hardware sets. H. All flush bolts shall have dust proof strikes. I. Push, Pulls, Kickpiates, Door Stops & Bumpers - Shall be Trimco. Items of Baldwin, Brookline and Trego are acceptable as equal. Thickness of kickplates shall be 16 gauge .050. ems+ J. Silencers - Shall be Glynn -Johnson GJ-64. Provide three (3) silencers for interior single doors and two (2) silencers for interior pairs of doors. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 K. Hand of Door: The drawings show the swing hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. L. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. M. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, latest edition. N. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. O. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard -manufacturer units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. 2.4 HARDWARE: A. Shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1 for extra heavy duty industrial use. See Attached Schedule 2.5 KEYING A. Door Locks: Master keyed Include control keying with removable core cylinders. B. Supply keys in the following quantities: (to match existing) 1. All locks shall be master keyed with existing master key system. 2. Furnish 6 master keys direct to Owner. 3. Exterior locks shall have construction cylinders, construction master keyed. Furnish ten (10) keys. Keys shall have key code stamped on bow of key. 4. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock. 5. Hardware supplier shall consult with Owner and secure written approval of the complete keying layout prior to placing lock order with factory. 6. After installation of all hardware and before acceptance of the building, hardware supplier shall check each locked door against key code index to make certain that correct locks and cylinders are on proper doors. On any incorrectly located cylinder, he shall tag and have general contractor relocate to proper position. 7. Hardware Schedule: (See Attached) 2.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 24 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 3.3 FINISHES A. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.3 INSTALLATION. A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Location for Builders' Hardware" DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 6 n Facilities Security Project 0201 by BHMA, except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by the Owner. C. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. D. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. E. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. G. Drill and countersink units that are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT: 3. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re4ubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. Adjust hardware for smooth operation under provisions of Section 01700. B. Instruct Government's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Furnish each door leaf with hardware items scheduled. If a door is shown on the Drawings and not included in hardware schedule then Contractor shall provide comparable hardware as doors at similar locations or functions, at no additional cost. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. 2. All hardware finish shall be BHMA 612. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 7 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE City Hall: Base Bid Heading #1 Dr. #2 Each door to have 3 Hinges BB 1279 4 %Z x 4 % US10A Hager 1 Lockset LR-1021 C-05-41 Simplex 1 Removable core 8000 x 613 Russwin 1 Closer DC2210 x 690 Russwin 1 Wall Bumper 409 x US10B Rockwood 3 Silencers GMF1000 Heading #2 Dr. #3 Each door to have 3 Hinges BB 1279 41/ x 41/ US10A Hager 1 Lockset CL3351 x NZD x 613 Russwin 1 Closer DC2210 x 690 Russwin 1 Wall Bumper 409 x US10B Rockwood 1 Set smoke seal S88 Pemko Civic Center: Base Bid Heading #3 Drs. #5, #7 Each door to have 1 Card reader PC95 x TR83 Locknetics Heading #4 Dr. #6 All hardware by door supplier. Health Department: Base Bid Heading #5 Dr. #8 Each pair doors to have 2 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 41/ x 41/ x US10A Hager 4 Hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4'/ NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10B Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Card reader PX95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Removable mull MUL Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent 2 Power supply 505 DE KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #6 Dr. #9 Each door to have 1 Deadlock 4875 x US10B Sargent DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 8 s f. Facilities Security Project Heading #7 Drs. #10, #12 Each door to have 1 Electric hinges 661279 ETW4 4 %2 x 4'/2 x US10A Hager 2 Hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4'/ x US10A NRP Hager 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #8 Dr. #11 Each pair doors to have .�. k 2 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4'/z x 4'/2 x US10A Hager 4 Hinges 13131279 4 %2 x 4 % NRP x US10A Hager 2 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Removable mull MUL Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent ,O, Heading #9 Dr. #14 Each pair doors to have 2 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4 %2 x 4'/ x US10A Hager 4 Hinges BB1279 4 %2 x 4 % NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10B Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Card reader PC95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Removable mull MUL Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent ,., 2 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #10 Dr. #13 .., Each door to have 1 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4 %2 x 4'/2 x US10A Hager 2 Hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4'/2 NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10B Locknetics 1 Cylinder Sargent 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #11 Drs. #15, #18 Each door to have 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Electric strike 9030 LPF x US10B Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #12 Drs. #16, #17 Each door to have 0201 1 Deadlock 4874 x US10B Sargent FOR DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 9 Facilities Security Project 0201 City Hall: Alternate No. 1 Heading #13 Drs. #20, #21 Each pair doors to have 1 Cylinder Russwin Coordinate with door supplier Heading #14 Dr. #22 Each door to have 1 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4 % x 4 %2 x US10A Hager 2 Hinges BB1279 4 %z x 4'/2 NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10B Locknetics 1 Cylinder Russwin 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 DE KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #15 Dr. #23 Each pair doors to have 2 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4 %2 x 4 % x US10A Hager 4 Hinges BB1279 4 %2 x 4 %Z x US10A NRP Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10A Locknetics 1 Cylinder Russwin 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Removable mull MUL Locknetics 1 Cylinder Russwin 1 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #16 Drs. #24, #26 Each door to have 1 Electric hinges 13131279 ETW4 4 % x 4 %Z x US10A Hager 2 Hinges BB1279 4 % x 4 % NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #17 Dr. #25 Each door to have 1 Electric hinge BB1279 ETW4 4 % x 4'/ x US10A Hager 2 Hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4'/2 NRP x US10A Hager 1 Exit device/ card reader 6010 DEL MDE SET PXI x US10B Locknetics 1 Cylinder Russwin 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 Locknetics 1 Power supply 505 DE KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 Locknetics Heading #18 Dr. #27 Each door to have 1 Deadlock DL4012 x US10B Russwin DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 110 Facilities Security Project Heading #19 Dr. #28 Each door to have 2 Electric hinges BB1279 ETW4 4'/2 x 4'/Z x US10A 4 Hinges 13131279 4'/2 x 4 % x US10A 1 Cylinder 1 Exit device 6010 DEL SET DT x US10B 1 Card reader PX 95 x TR83 1 Removable mull MUL 1 Power supply 505 DE KLC ATR REX 100 SBP2 END OF SECTION k /M Hager Hager Russwin Locknetics Locknetics Locknetics Locknetics 0201 DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 11 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 08721 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric operated doors. B. Control devices. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Aluminum doors and frames. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinder locks, gasketing. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass Products. Section 16120 - Conductors: Wiring and conduit from door operator to control switch. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A156.10 (1979) - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. B. ANSI A156.19 Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. C. ANSI Al 17.1 - Specifications for Making Building and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA 101 (1981) - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. F. UL 325 (1973) (R1977) - Electric Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems. G. ASTM Z - 97.1 (1975) H. ASTM A123 (1978) Zinc Coatings I. AAMA (1980) Designation system for Aluminum Finishes J. SSPC - PS 2.02 64T Steel Structures Painting Manual (1973). 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Standard Products: Automatic sliding doors consisting of glazed aluminum doors suspended from overhead track assemblies, glazed aluminum sidelights, transoms, aluminum framing system, electric (electo-mechanical) door operators mounted in headers, thresholds, and motion detection sensor controllers shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of automatic doors which meet specification requirements. These standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two year use shall have included similar size commercial establishment installations with traffic rates averaging a minimum of 20,000 opening and closing cycles per week. The automatic door system AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS a*a Section 08721 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 shall be capable of operating without failure of any component for not less than 300,000 cycles with normal maintenance as defined in the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. Door shall conform to ANSI 156.10 and operators shall comply with UL 325. All automatic entrance/exit doors shall be the product of one manufacturer. B. Corrosion Protection: Protection against corrosion shall be integral in the design criteria for production and installation of the entire door package. It shall be accomplished by discerning selection of materials initially and by appropriate protection against corrosive action wherever destructively dissimilar materials are unavoidably in contact. All ferrous components, brackets, fittings, and fasteners shall be galvanized conforming to ASTM Al23, have an equally effective corrosion resistant plating, or have a factory applied protective coating complying with SSPC-PS 2.02-64T. C. Installer Qualifications: Automatic door package shall be installed by a firm regularly engaged in installation of aluminum doors, frames, door operators, and controllers of the type specified. Installer shall be certified as approved and authorized by the manufacturer. D. Verification of Dimensions: The contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with all details of the work and working conditions, verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Architect of any discrepancy before performing any work. The contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of the work to the building structure and the work of all trades. E. Service: The entire automatic entrance/exit door system shall be serviced by one reliable service organization, preferably the installer, certified by the manufacturer as qualified, approved and authorized to provide regular preventive maintenance and emergency service and repairs during the warranty period of the contract. The contractor shall submit the name, address, and telephone number of this organization, which shall be located within a 200 mile radius of the installation and capable of responding within 24 hours of notification. F. Wind Load Resistance: Members and anchors shall be fabricated and installed to resist a minimum of 20 PSF positive and negative wind load for 10 seconds without permanent deformation, skewing, or loss of door function. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Automatic door equipment to accommodate pedestrian traffic, and weight of doors. B. Design system to operate, hold open and close doors under design wind and suction loads calculated in accordance with Uniform Building Code. C. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 140 degrees F (minus 7 to plus 60 degrees C) ambient. D. Full adjustable operators for opening and closing speeds, checking speeds, hold open time, and cancellation on activation of fire alarm and smoke detection system. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Provide overall layout drawing indicating location and exact dimensions of each door unit. Furnish shop drawings, including manufacturer's standard drawings, which shall contain dimensioned plans, elevations and sections clearly showing size, shape and thickness of materials, complete details of door and frame construction, joint and connections and installation of hardware. Drawing information shall include frame sizes, rough -in requirements, templates, wiring diagrams and details, installation instruction, and any other data ,needed by fabricators and installers for proper preparation of interface openings, faces and connections, and coordination of related work by other trades. Contractor shall provide installation details showing anchors, method and details of anchorage to location, details of joining with other work, expansion provisions, glazing details, hardware, and other components not included in manufacturer's data. AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines and conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes. D. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and component templates. F. Samples: Submit samples of each required aluminum finish, minimum one inch wide, minimum 3 square inches, on alloys to be used for the work. Show range of color variation. G. Manufacturer's Data: Provide data stating manufacturer's name, brand name, model name, and/or number, address, and telephone number. Data shall consist of manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, specifications, catalog pages, cuts, and data sheets. Data shall indicate compliance with specification requirements. H. Submittal Schedule Section 08721 - Automatic Sliding Entrance/Exit Doors Submittal Item Description Installer Qualifications Mfgr's certificate Manufacturer's Data Automatic Sliding door - catalog data, specs, tech and descriptive data Shop Drawings Layout dwgs, diagrams, templates, details, installation instructions. Samples Aluminum finish samples. Operating & Maintenance Operating Manual with Parts List, maintenance instructions, parts list. ., 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. r 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Operating and Maintenance Manual with Parts List: After approval of the manufacturer's data, shop drawings and samples, and not later than 30 days prior to the project completion date, the contractor shall furnish Operating and Maintenance Manuals with Parts Lists. C. Operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for start-up, operating and shutdown shall be furnished. The instructions shall include a brief description of equipment components, their location, their basic operating features, owner's operating checks and trouble shooting tips. The manufacturer's name and model number shall also be indicated. D. Maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance, and probable breakdowns and repairs shall be furnished. The instructions shall include photographs, illustrations, and diagrams for the system as installed. E. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, proprietary names, and catalog numbers of each component. The data shall include illustrated spare parts data for each component and a complete list of replacement parts with catalog numbers, current unit AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCEIEXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 3 r�* Facilities Security Project 0201 prices and source of supply. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI A156.10, ANSI Al56.19, UL 325, and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with — minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer. — 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code and ANSI A117.1 for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual opening of doors. B. Conform to NFPA 101. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.12 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE _ A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01400. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: All automatic sliding door system components shall be identified after fabrication by marks clearly indicating their location in the building. Components shall be delivered under protective cover and stored within dry enclosed spaces at the building. They shall be protected from weather and damage. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for motor and compressor and operating unit. 1.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.16 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700. B. Provide wrenches and tools required for maintenance of equipment. AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. BESAM, INC. 1. Exterior Doors: Power -Glide 3000-2, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Inside Slide (SO-SX-SX-SO), with transom. 2. Interior Doors: Power -Glide 3000-2, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Outside Slide, (O-SX-SX-O), with transom. 3. Door Operator: Self-contained electro-mechanical operator. 4. Door Control: Commander I Motion Detector, one-way traffic. B. DOR-O-MATICDivision'of Republic Industries, Inc. 1. Exterior Doors: Astro-Slide Il, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Recessed Application, Inside Slide (SO-SX-SX-SO), with transom. 2. Interior Doors: Astro- Slide ll, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Recessed Application, Outside Slide (O-SX-SX-O), withtransom. 3. Door Operator: Astro-Slide II self-contained electo-mechanical operator. 4. Door Control: Astro-Scan Motion Detector, one-way traffic. C. HORTON AUTOMATICS Division of Overhead Door Corporation of Texas. 1. Exterior Doors: Originator Series 2310, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Inside Slide (SO-SX-SX- SO), with transom. 2. Interior Doors: Originator Series 2110, Bi-Parting Sliding Doors, Outside Slide (O-SX-SX-O), with transom. 3. Door Operator: Horton Series 2000 self-contained electro-mechanical operator. 4. Door Control: Horton Microwave Motion Detector, one-way traffic. D. STANLEY MAGIC -DOOR Division of The Stanley Works: 1. Exterior Doors`. Weather -Wise 8000 Automatic Sliding Entrance System (SO-SX-SX-SO) with transom. 2. Interior Doors: Weather -Wise 4000 ES Automatic Sliding Entrance System (O-SX-SX-O) with transom. 3. Door Operator: Dyna-Glide Electric for Weather -Wise 8000 and 4000 ES door system. 4. Door Control: Magic -Scan Sensor. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Sizes: Automatic sliding entrance and exit doors shall be bi-parting type with a net door opening of 42". The door and frame units and overall dimensions shall be as required to fit the openings indicated on the drawings. B. Aluminum Extrusions: Aluminum alloy and temper shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish and control of color, but not less than 27,000 PSI ultimate tensile strength. Provide main extrusions of not less than 0.125 inch wall thickness. C. Aluminum Finish: 1. Preparation: After fabrication of doors and frames, prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer's recommendations. Process all components of each assembly simultaneously to attain uniform color. 2. Samples: Establish samples of the required finish for approval, as specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS, prior to fabrication of the work. Material finishes with objectionable variations from the established samples will be rejected. 3. Finish: NAAMM AA-M21C22A31, (minimum thickness of 0.4 mils). Finish all exposed areas of doors and frames and components with AA-M 1 2-C42-RIX, Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 Flurocarbon to match aluminum storefront. D. Fabrication: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each continuous unit of framework, doors, sidelights, transom panel, and all accessory items as a factory fabricated "package entrance" unit. Complete the fabrication assembly, finishing, application of hardware and all other work, before AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 shipment to the project site, to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only to the extent necessary for shipment and installation. E. Doors and Frames: All sections of doors, headers, mullions, sidelights, thresholds, and trim shall be extruded aluminum alloy, as specified. Doors and sidelights shall be heavy-duty bolted tongue and groove or reinforced interlocked constructions to assure against racking failure. Extruded members serving as structural support shall be capable of spanning 15'-0" without the use of intermediate supports. Each sliding panel shall be suspended by at least two adjustable, high quality, steel, nylon or delrin roller wheels, with ball bearing or oil impregnated sealed bearings, from an overhead track with an extremely durable roller surface. Adjustable anti -riser devices shall prevent door derailing and avoid start -stop -reverse bucking and jumping. F. Emergency Breakaway: The automatic door system shall be equipped with emergency release hardware which allows sliding door panels and exterior sidelights to breakaway and swing out 90 degrees in the direction of egress. Hardware shall include pivots and breakaway release latches which hold doors in the closed position during normal operation. Doors sliding on outside of header and fixed sidelights shall breakaway and swing out 90 degrees from any position in their cycle. Doors sliding on inside of headers shall be provided with breakaway exterior sidelights which allow breakaway sliding door panels to sing 90 degrees from any position in their travel cycle, thus providing full instant use of the entire opening in compliance with NFPA 101. Breakaway pressure shall be field adjustable to local requirements, but will be factory set at 50 pounds maximum. Power shall be automatically disconnected upon panic breakout. G. Security Hooking Devices: Provide security hooking devices at top and bottom of meeting stiles of sliding doors and sidelights. Hooks shall automatically secure sliding doors and sidelights together when sliding doors reach fully closed position, and shall prevent breakaway when sliding doors are locked. H. Glazing Provisions: Glass conforming with applicable requirements of ANSI Z97.1 shall be provided under specification SECTION: GLASS AND GLAZING. Glazing must be strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Doors and sidelights shall be provided with removable extruded elastomeric glazing stops. Bevel stops shall be furnished in horizontals. Minimum wall thickness of extrusions shall be 0.062 inch. Weather-stripping: The door system shall be provided with heavy duty weather-strip, installed at top, bottom and both sides, between doors, doors and sidelights, and between emergency breakaway panels and stiles, to seal doors when closed. Lead edges of strike rails shall have heavy duty double pile weather stripping. Joining vertical panel rail shall have complimentary heavy duty single pile weather-strip, and horizontal rails shall be weather-stripped with heavy duty single pile material. Reduced Door Opening: The automatic doors shall be provided with a control which allows the doors to open to full width or which limits opening to partial width, narrower than standard, according to weather and traffic conditions. The switch shall be located in the vertical doorjamb. K. Operator: Automatic doors shall be driven by an electo-mechanical operator housed overhead in the door header. A full width, dull size cover panel shall provide access for servicing. The electo- mechanical drive unit shall provide power open, power closed operation and opening and closing checking action. The operator shall be capable of trouble free operation in a temperature operating range of minus 20 degrees F to plus 140 degrees F. Sliding door operation: Door Speed (not checking speed): Minimum 2 feet per second opening; 1 foot per second closing; adjustable speed control for opening and closing cycle. Open Time Delay: Adjustable 2 to 26 seconds. Stall Force: Maximum 30 LBF closing cycle; maximum 16 LBF closing check zone. Manual Operation: In accordance with ANSI 156.10 and NFPA 101. Power Switch: A manual power ON and OFF switch shall be located inside of header or doorjamb. AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 6 Facilities Security Project 0201 It shall serve a second function as "hold -open" for door. Safety Reverse: Sensing device shall automatically reverse doors upon encountering obstruction during closing cycle returning doors to full open position. When an obstruction is encountered during opening cycle, the door shall come to a complete stop. Maximum 15 LBS exertion to activate; field adjustable to meet conditions. L. Safety Hold Open: The automatic door system shall include a photo -electric pulsed infra -red light emitting diode (LED) safety hold open device(s). At least one LED shall be recessed into the _ vertical door package members located as required by ANSI 156.10. Additional LED units may be provided. The beam(s) shall span the entire width of the sliding door opening and shall prevent doors from closing when the beam(s) is obstructed. The hold open beam shall be deactivated when the sliding doors are in the closed position. M. Motion Detection Control: Actuating control for the automatic door system shall be solid state microwave motion detection sensor mounted on door header. The sensor shall detect objects - moving at a rate of two or more inches per second within an approximate 4 foot by 6 foot semi- circular area of control. The area of control shall not exceed 4 feet measured horizontally from door at floor level. Both area of control pattern and sensitivity shall be field adjustable. Unit housing shall be vandal resistant and factory sealed for protection against dust, moisture, and the elements. Control shall not be affected by extremes or changes in ambient temperature, humidity, .3 air turbulence, light level or noise. All adjustment shall be accessible only when cover is removed. N. Key Locks: Sliding door panels shall have factory -installed, maximum security, standard -sized cylinder locks conforming to NFPA and key activated cylinders inside and outside. 2.3 SEALANTS A. Provide sealants as specified in SECTION: CAULKING AND SEALANTS. Apply sealants where indicated by door manufacturer, such as perimeter of frames and joints at sill tracks and thresholds. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of system, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds; and shall be submitted for approval. 2.5 FINISHES A. Exposed Operator and Components: Finish to match door and door hardware finish. B. Steel Clips, Supports and Steel Anchor: One coat of steel primer. PART 3 EXECUTION r-+ 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that surfaces and openings and recesses are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer. C Prior to installation of the work of the SECTION, carefully inspect the installed work of all other r^ related trades and verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that automatic doors may be installed in strict accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's published recommendations. In the event of discrepancy, immediately obtain documentation of conditions. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 08721 Page 7 9 Facilities SecurityProject 0201 B. COORDINATION: Coordinate all interface requirements for frame installation, sill, threshold, and header installation, and electrical connection in a timely manner to permit progress of the total work. Provide information specified in PARAGRAPH: SUBMITTALS, as required, to related trades. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of door and frame units and live and dead loads that may be transmitted to operating equipment. C. Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation. D. INSTALLATION: Automatic doors shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawing requirements. All components shall be firmly anchored in place for long life under hard use. Set units plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack of frame. Anchor solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion or mal-alignment. Sit sill tracks in recesses where indicated. Shim sill tracks or thresholds to required level and anchor rigidly in place. Aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry, concrete, steel or other material potentially creative of corrosive action shall be protected from contact by use of neoprene gaskets or a thick coat of approved protective coating. Apply joint sealants at frame perimeter, sill tracks and thresholds as specified in SECTION: CAULKING AND SEALANTS to provide weather -tight construction. Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of work. E. Coordinate installation of components with related and adjacent work, level and plumb. ^- 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean and adjust work under provisions of 01700. B. Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation. C. Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces. D. After repeated operation of installation equivalent to 3 days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door operators and controls for optimum operation conditions and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean all exposed surfaces. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. Clean aluminum surfaces and remove excess sealants. Remove debris from project site and off government property. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS Section 087211 Page 8 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL - Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal work, windows, doors, and aluminum frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in �^* Buildings. _ B. ASTM C669 - Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of Metal Sash. ^^* C. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. - D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. !^^ G. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. H. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Safety Glass. I. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E283 - Test Method For Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. I" L. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. M. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/FrostPoint of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. L„ N. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. O. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units. P. FGMA - Glazing Manual. Q. FGMA - Sealant Manual. R. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual FRI GLAZING t Section 08800 Page 1 sr�, Facilities Security Project 0201 S. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association, 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with Uniform Building Code. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size, exampling glass units, coloration and design. E. Samples: Submit 6 inch (150 mm) long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Certificates: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01400 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). GLAZING Section 08800 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: ,. 1. PPG 2. ASG 3. LOF 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. B. Float Glass (Type FG-A): ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 6 mm minimum thick. C. Safety Glass (Type FG-B): Clear; fully tempered conforming to ANSI Z97.1; 6 mm thick. D. Tinted Glass (Type FG-C): Float type, tempered, light reducing in grey color; light transmittance of 41 percent, shading coefficient of 0.62, 6 mm thick. E. Wired Glass (Type FG-H): Clear, polished both sides, square mesh of woven stainless steel wire of 1/2 inch (12 mm) grid size; 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. F. Tinted Glass (Type D) Float type tempered to match type C above. G. Laminated Glass (Type E) laminated with plaster layer to ASTM C1172, 6mm thick. H. Bullet Resistive Glass: (Type GCP) Level IV, UL 752 glass/polycarbonate composite, 1.25" nominal thickness. Manufacturers of Bullet Resistive Glass: 1. Norshield Security Projects 3224 Mobile Hwy. Montgomery, Alabama 36108-4400 800-633-1968 2. North American Bullet Proof 1003 Paulsun y San Antonio, TX 78219 210-225-0982 3. Waco Composites 481-A Texas Central Parkway PO Box 21223 Waco, Texas 76702-1223 254-776-8880 4. Others as approved. GLAZING Section 08800 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 I. Surface Applied Security Film: Mylar type .015" nominal thick, visible light transmittance of 48% and solar light transmittance of 48%, shading coefficient of .64, 60" minimum width. Manufacturers of Security Film: _ 1. Llumar Window Film CPF Films, Inc. Martinsville, VA 24115 540-627-3000 -- 800-2-LLUMAR 2. Shattergard Window Film 8351 Roswell Road Ste. 196 Atlanta, Georgia 30350 — 888-306-7998 Attn: Jordan Frankel, ext. 14 3. Thermogard Solar Film PO Box 16716 — St. Petersburg, FL 33733 727-458-6657 4. Others as approved. 2.2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Temp Glass Southern 2. Biracon 3. Guardian 4. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Insulated Glass Units (Type SG -A): ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with silicone sealant dual edge seal; outer pane of tinted glass, inner pane of clear glass, purge interpane space with dry hermetic air; total unit thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum. Provide manufacturers standard ten year warranty. C. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum mitered and spigoted corners. D. Edge Seal Material: Mill finish aluminum color. 2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pecora 2. Trimco 3. Master Putty 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. 1 B. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): ASTM C920,'Type S, Grade NS, single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25 ; color as selected. 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Pecora 2. Trimco 3. Master Putty — 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864 Option 1, Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. C. Spacer Shims: ASTM C864 Option1 Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 GLAZING Section 08800 Page 4 I Facilities Security Project 0201 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application. D. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color, size to suit application. PWWk E. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Option 1, Resilient extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. OWN F. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. t 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide testing and analysis of glass to Section 01400. B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ` A. Section 01400 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glazing pane. Seal comers by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 114 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from comers. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. e�• D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after Work is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. GLAZING Section 08800 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work. B. After installation, mark pane with an W by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION 0201 GLAZING Section 08800 Page 6 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Gypsum board C. Taped and sanded joint treatment D. Texture finish. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board. D. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. t E. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. F. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. elk G. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. H. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial)Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. i I. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and k Manufactured Housing. J. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. K. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. L. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. M. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. N. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. i GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: 45 STC in accordance with ASTM E90. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01400. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS _ A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. United States Gypsum. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. National Gypsum. 2. Gold Bond. 3. Georgia-Pacific C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; GA-216 and GA-600; galvanized sheet steel, 26 gage (0.48 mm) thick, C shape, with knurled faces. B. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. GA-216 and GA-600. C. Fasteners: ASTM C514. ASTM C1002. GA-216. D. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. _ E. Adhesive: ASTM C557. F. Studs: ASTM A525, non -load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for _ utility access. G. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer. H. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose. I. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws. J.. Shee.t_Metal:Ba_cking: 20 gage.(.(�.9 rnm.tttick),a2ia/an�ed steel for r�info�cetr�nt_ K. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated or drilled expansion bolts. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 2 — Facilities Security Project 0201 L. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut tapered and beveled edges. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, un-faced, 2" (50 mm) thick. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; as *+ recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. C. Comer Beads:Metal. D. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC, L, LK, U exposed reveal bead. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. F. Textured Finish Materials: Latex based texturing material, containing fine silicone sand aggregate. - G. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Metal Stud spacing: 16 inch (400 mm) on center. C. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extend stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. D. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 3.3 ERECTION n A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 16 inch (400 mm) oc. B. Place one beads of acoustical sealant. between runners and substrate and studs and adjacent comtrtirtion to,. C. Place two bead of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces to achieve an GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 3 A Facilities Security Project acoustical seal. 0201 D. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. E. Install studs vertically at 16 inch (400 mm) oc. 1. Interior Stud Spacing and Gage: 16 inch (400 mm) o.c., 25 ga. for heights up to 13 ft. ( 4 m) 16 inch (400 mm) o.c., 20 ga. for heights over 13 ft. (4 m) but not more than 18 ft (5.5 m) 16 inch (400 mm) o.c., 20 ga. for all walls scheduled to receive ceramic the 12 inch (300 mm) o.c., 20 ga. for all plaster surfaced partitions F. Chase Wall Studs: Position double row of studs vertically in runners so studs are opposite each other in pairs with flanges pointing in same direction. Space at 16" (400 mm) o.c. unless otherwise noted. Anchor each stud to runner flanges with screws. Cross brace between rows at quarter points in partition height, width 1" (25 mm) screws spaced 8" (200 mm) o.c. in each stud web. G. Align stud web openings horizontally. H. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld. I. Stud splicing not permissible. J. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. K. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2" (50 mm) from each side of openings. L. Window, Door and Borrowed -Light Frames: 1. Studs adjacent to window, door and borrowed light frames shall be securely screwed or bolted to jamb and head anchors clips. 2. At the frame jambs install two floor -to -ceiling height runners nested into a box form in addition to one STIO stud on each side of frame to act as strut -studs. Boxed steel runners shall be screw attached together using 1/2 inch (12 mm) type S-12 screws @ 12 inch (300 mm) o.c. maximum. Attach STIO stud to boxed steel runners with S-12 screws @ 12 inch (300 mm) o.c. maximum. 3. At the frame head, install steel runner for openings up to 48" (1 168 mm) boxed studs in addition to runner for openings up to 96" (2 388 mm) maximum; and tubular structural girls for openings 96" (2 388 mm) or more in width. Anchor runners to boxed studs to structural girts with S-12 screws same as noted above for jambs. Cut runner long enough to provide minimum 2" (50 mm) end flanges for attachment to strut -studs at jambs. Fasten runner to strut -studs with at least four 1/2" (12 mm) type S-12 LPH screws per flange. M. Brace stud framing system rigid. N. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames and window frames; install supports and attachments. O. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. P. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions, extend stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. Q. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. R. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and other surface mounted equipment and fixtures. S. Girls: Provide stud materialplacedhorizontal in the wall at mid height of the partition or not to -- exceed 60" (1 520 mm) on center vertical. Girts shall be cut between and securely fastened with GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 4 Facilities Security Project Y 0201 sheet metal screws to studs. Additional girls shall be placed at or within 12" (300 mm) of ceiling line in all partitions extending above ceiling. Girt at ceiling shall be full width of studs to provide effective fire stop, at the Contractor's option he may substitute 1 1/2" (38 mm) cold -rolled plaster channel passing through openings in studs at girt location other than ceiling line. Cold rolled channels shall be securely attached to each stud. 3.4 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls. B. Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 24 inch (600 mm) on center, not more than 4" (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inch (600 mm) on center. C. Erect free-standing metal stud framing concrete or concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24" (600 mm) past each end of openings. ' E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. A+ 3.6 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal Framing: Two beads. 2. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, and duct work and rough -in boxes. 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Erect single layer board horizontal, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. D. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. E. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed. F. Place comer beads at external comers. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.8 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum .03 inches (0.8 mm). GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Taping, filling, and sanding is required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. 3.9 TEXTURE FINISH A. Roller apply finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 6 "P" Facilities Security Project 0201 ^+ SECTION 09400 TERRAZZO PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following type of terrazzo: Epoxy resin terrazzo. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ems+ t C. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for concrete substrate, including levelness tolerances. D. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for furnishing and installing joint sealants. e!� 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Condition of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of terrazzo, accessory item and component material specified. Include substrate testing and preparation requirements. , C. Shop Drawings: Showing layout of divider strips, control joint strips, and base and border strips. D. Samples: 6 inch square samples of each different pattern (two of each pattern to establish a range of acceptability), color, and type of terrazzo required. Provide minimum 6 inch long samples of each type accessory item specified. E. Material Certification: Supplier's / manufacturer's written instruction that terrazzo materials provided meet or exceed specified NTMA properties. F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of written instructions for recommended periodic maintenance of each type of terrazzo. i G. Installer qualifications: Demonstrate installer's experience including references and projects completed and in use for viewing by the Government. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NTMA Standards: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc, (NTMA). B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed terrazzo installations similar in material and extent t that indicated for Project and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance. C. Manufacturer's Instruction: In addition to specified requirements, comply with resin manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for substrate preparation, materials storage, mixing and ,� application, finishing, and curing. Facilities Security Project 0201 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 THIN SET TERRAZZO MATERIALS A. Epoxy Resin Terrazzo Matrix: Thermosetting, amine cured epoxy resin and hardener, mineral filler, and color pigment, complying with NTMA "Guide Specification for Epoxy Terrazzo" and as required to match Architect's sample. B. Aggregates: Natural, sound, crushed marble chips, colors selected and graded to match Architect's samples, but with maximum size within limits of workability for terrazzo thickness indicated. C. Substrate Primer: Two -component resin or other compound, recommended by matrix manufacturer, to penetrate and seal substrate and provide maximum bond of terrazzo to substrate. D. Finishing Group: Resin based grout with filler and pigments as recommended by matrix manufacture. 2.2 TERRAZZO ACCESSORIES A. Divider Strips: Depth and style required for terrazzo type and thickness. Width, material, and color as indicated. Angle or "T" type for adhesive bonding to substrate. Unless otherwise indicated, use 16 gauge divider strips top, as follows: Half -hard brass (must be approved by resin supplier). B. Accessory Strips: Match width, material, and color of divider strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide following types of accessory strips as required for complete installation. Base bead and cove base dividers. C. Control Strips: Double or split units, 1/8 inch wide, of same material and color as divider strips with 1/8 inch wide full depth filler, laminated between strips. D. Filler: Black neoprene. E. Divider Strip Adhesive: Trowelable mixture of fine sand and bonding agent, specially compounded by manufacturer for this use. F. Cleaner: Chemically neutral, liquid cleaner, with Ph factor between 7 and 10, of formulation recommended by sealer manufacturer for type of terrazzo used and complying with NTMA requirements. G. Interior Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip resistant penetrating sealer with Ph factor between 7 and 10, that does not affect color or physical properties of terrazzo surface. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine concrete substrate to ensure that surface levelness tolerances are within tolerance ranges required by NTMA for type of terrazzo application specified. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory levelness tolerances. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory tolerances have been corrected and are ready to receive terrazzo. B. Clean and prepare substrate to comply with NTMA specifications for type of terrazzo application indicated. Clean substrate of loose chips and foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. For thin set terrazzo, comply with resin manufacturer's recommendations for proportioning mixes, installing strips, and placing, curing, grinding, and finishing. TERRAZZO Section 09400 Page 2 ' Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Provide terrazzo bases, thresholds, stair treads, and landings without interruptions of seams, except where divider strips, control joints, and expansion joints are indicated. Place and finish terrazzo around obstructions to achieve continuous color, pattern, and finish. C. Install divider and accessory strips in adhesive setting bed, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without voids below strips. Provide mechanical anchorage as required for adequate attachment of strips to substrate. D. Provide control joints where indicated by installing angle type divider strips back to back with neoprene rubber filler cemented between strips, flush with finish floor. E. Install abrasive inserts in accordance with insert manufacturer's instructions. ems, 3.3 THIN SETTERRAZZO A. Comply with NTMA guide specifications previously referenced under "Thin Set Terrazzo Materials" ' and with matrix manufacturer's directions for installing and finishing thin -set terrazzo. Match Architect's sample and provide total material thickness indicated. B. Exercise extreme care to ensure fluids from grinding operation do not react with divider or control strips to produce a stain on aggregate. C. Delay grinding and finishing until heavy trade work is completed and construction traffic through the area is restricted. 3.4 CLEANING, SEALING, AND PROTECTING A w A. Clean terrazzo after installing and finishing operations are completed, complying with sealer manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces to comply with sealer manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect terrazzo from damage and wear during construction operation. D. Protect adjacent finish materials especially decorative concrete floor tiles when pouring, grinding or finishing terrazzo. 3.5 FINAL CLEANING .-. A. Clean terrazzo as recommended by manufacturer of sealer and machine buff if required when building is ready for occupancy. End of Section �A TERRAZZO Section 09400 Page 3 Facilities Security Project F 0201 SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES r�+ A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim. B. Acoustical tile. C. Non -fire rated assembly. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in .a Panels. C. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. D. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. E. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. ti F. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. G. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, and acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples full size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit one sample each, 6 inches (150 mm) long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09511 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 0201 A. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable Uniform Building Code for combustibility requirements for materials. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010. B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide one carton of extra tile to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Chicago Metallic B. Donn C. National Rolling Mills D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Non -fire Rated Grid: to match existing. B. Accessories: Edge moldings and hold down clips required for suspended grid system. C. Support Channels and Hangers: Primed steel; size and type to suit application, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Armstrong Cork Company B. U.S. Gypsum SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09511 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 ^" C. Celotex D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL UNIT MATERIALS A. 2' X 2' units to match existing. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION - LAY -IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. .. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches 150 mm) of each corner; or support components independently. ., H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. J. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to basket weave pattern. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09511 Page 3 i Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut the to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbett the edge. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. G. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09511 Page 4 .. Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL - Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the .contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rubber Sheet Flooring. B. Floor Mats 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09400-Terrazzo: Base and floor material. s, 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. r , B. ASTM F1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. C. FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface with Backing. D. FS L-F-475 Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. E. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid. F. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS t... A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. .,, B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns and colors. C. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating color and pattern for each floor material for each color specified. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Submit certification of flooring manufacturer's approval of all flooring 0" materials and fillers, primers, adhesives and concrete curing compounds used in association with their product. Provide three copies of manufacturers field application manual. E. Provide written report of moisture and bond test prior to installation of flooring. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code for flame/smoke rating requirements of 75 or less / 450 or less in accordance with ASTM E84 and ASTM E648. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect roll materials from damage. "^ RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 Page 1 r__1 Facilities Security Project 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0201 A. Subfloor tolerances: Tolerances are plus or minus within specified distance and are not cumulative. 1. New or existing slabs at rubber tile floors: True to plane within 1/8" in 10 ft. Deviations shall be photographed and a copy sent to the Contracting Officer. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for five days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve, temperature stability. Deliver materials in unbroken factory containers and store in cool, dry place. Each container shall bear manufacturer's name, pattern number, and lot number. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer five days prior to, during, and 72 hours after installation of materials. C. Job Conditions: Examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contracting Officer in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Testing: 1. BOND TEST Conduct Bond Test to determine the compatibility of resilient flooring adhesives to concrete floors after removal of old adhesives, curing agents, breaker compounds, dust inhibitors, oil, grease, paint, and other special surface treatments and conditions. Test areas shall be selected adjacent to walls, columns, etc., and other light -traffic areas. Using the flooring specified in the building specifications, install 3' x 3' (91.4 cm x 91.4 cm) panels spaced approximately 50 feet (15.24 m) apart throughout the floor area. Install the panels with the recommended adhesives to be used in the actual installation. If the panels are securely bonded after 72 hours, then the floor surface is sufficiently clean of foreign material for satisfactory installation. 2. CALCIUM CHLORIDE TEST: The general contractor shall conduct Calcium Chloride Tests before installing resilient flooring. Tests shall be made where concrete is least subject to drying conditions. Where curing agents have been used, they shall be removed in and around the test areas to help obtain accurate results. The tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM F 1869, "Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride." Maximum acceptable moisture emission levels are shown in the table below. If the tests fail, the concrete is not sufficiently dry at that time for a resilient flooring installation. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Levels Flooring (1) Pounds per Micrograms Kilograms per Perms/On- Perms/Below- 1,000 square per second second per Grade Grade feet per 24 per square square meter hours meter VCT, Safety Zone 5 280 2.44 0.3 0.1 Safety Zone w/ S- 30 3 170 1.46 0.3 0.1 3. ALKALI TEST —Concrete floors should be tested for alkalinity before the installation of resilient flooring. The allowable readings are 5 to 9 on the pH scale. 1.9 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 +" 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Extra stock: At completion of project, deliver to City the following minimum amounts of materials of same brand, size, and pattern as used on project; furnish materials from same manufactured lot as the materials installed: 1. Floor tile, vinyl and rubber - two complete cartons of each type and pattern installed, but not less than 5% of the total scheduled. 2. Base - 40 lin. ft. of each color and type installed but not less than 5% of the total scheduled. 1.11 Warranty: Submit manufacturers standard five year warranty. Installation shall be that as required to satisfy the manufacturer warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - FLOORING A. Rubber Tile: 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through total thickness. 1. Back: Roughened for adhesive bonding 2. Total Thickness: .15 inch (4.0 mm) 3. Sheet Size: 3.5 ft x 3.5 ft. (1 m x 1 m) or 3.2 ft x 3.2 ft (.9 m x .9 m) 4. Design: Raised stud 5. Manufacturers: a) Marley Flexco Radial 11. a) Pirelli Industrial Products Corporation Style BJ Chamfered Stud. b) Endura Style 130. c) Mondo American Style MR 2.2 MATERIALS — FLOOR MAT A. Equal to Model 554 by Reese Floor Protection systems: http:Nwww.reeseusa.com 1-800-824-3348. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Floor Leveling Compound: Polymer modified liquid emulsion with Portland Cement and sand. Ardex P51 Primer in association with Ardex SD-L. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Install flooring and base after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. Verity concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. �** 3.2 PREPARATION h A. Remove all sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface; true to plane and level. Test "* the surface with a ten -foot straight edge for uniformity and fill or cut to achieve a tolerance of one - eight inch in ten feet. Domes, ridges or humps shall be lowered by bush hammer 1/8 inch below w ' mean floor datum B. Prior to installation of finish floor coverings, remove dirt, oil, grease, paint and other foreign matter from surfaces. RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Prime surfaces thoroughly. D. Inspect surfaces for holes, cracks and other abrasions, and fill with floor - leveling compound. E. Inspect surfaces for deviations beyond allowable tolerances. Fill depressions with floor - leveling compound and grind down high spots to obtain allowable tolerances. F. Trowel and featheredge leveling compound to a smooth and level surface. G. Leave sub floors clean, true to plane within allowable tolerances, and ready to receive finish flooring. H. Maintain 70 degree F. minimum temperature 72 hours before and after laying floor. Stack materials in prepared areas at 70 degree F. 48 hours prior to laying floor. I. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. J. Vacuum clean substrate. K. Re -apply primer to concrete surfaces to assure bond of filler to concrete. NOTE: Concrete subfloors must be clean, solid, dry and properly primed for a successful installation. Shake well and mix ARDEX P-51 1:1 with water and apply with a soft push broom (Do not use paint rollers, mops or spray equipment). Do not leave any bare spots. Remove any puddles and allow to dry to a clear, thin film (3 hrs. min., 24 hours max.). Low substrate temperatures and/or high ambient humidity require a longer drying time. Do not install ARDEX products until primer has dried thoroughly. Very absorbent concrete may require two applications of primer to avoid bubbles and pinholes in the leveling compound. In such cases, make an initial application of ARDEX P-51 diluted with 3 parts water. Let dry thoroughly and install a second application of ARDEX P-51 diluted 1:1 with water. 3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR TILES AND BASE: A. Where new the is shown or required, remove existing floor tiles, base and adhesive completely. Proceed with installation as specified for new work. B. Existing tile scheduled to remain shall be stripped with 00 steel wool, cleaned and waxed as herein specified. 3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL: A. Install flooring and base after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLATION - RUBBER FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. Apply thin uniform film of adhesive, spread evenly with notched steel trowel, in accordance with directions on container. Allow adhesive to cure 30 minutes prior to tile installation. D. Set flooring in place, press with 100 lb. roller in each direction to attain full adhesion. RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 * E. Lay flooring with joints and seams as shown on the drawings. F. Install tile to pattern, beginning at center of room, working toward walls, square with room axis. Adjust width of border tiles as required and scribe to walls and projections. Verify pattern of the P7 (dissection of gram) with Architect or his authorized representative before laying tile. G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. H. Install resilient edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight butt joints, true to line. J. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. K. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and other such items as occur within finished floor areas: maintain continuity of color and pattern. 3.6 INSTALLATION — FLOOR MATS A. Cut Aluminum floor mat in carefully to abut rubber tile closely on three sides. Align lip of mat with door opening. 3.7 CLEANING AND WAXING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Allow 24 hours after laying flooring materials before beginning cleaning process. Clean flooring materials with a neutral cleaner and allow to dry. �., E. Immediately prior to final inspection, apply a second coat of wax and machine buff. F. Remove cartons and rubbish from site. �.. 3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Prohibit moving equipment and/or traffic on floor finish for 3 full days (72 hours) after installation. Do not wet mop flooring within one week of installation. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 09900 — PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide painting and finishing of surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, where new work is performed including mechanical and electrical equipment unless otherwise noted not to be painted. B. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. C. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, and lead coated copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or scheduled. D. Other surfaces not to be painted, unless otherwise noted, include pre -cast concrete panels, face brick; synthetic plaster, pre -finished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings; items with factory applied final finish; chases; and plenums above suspended ceilings, except as noted otherwise. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals - Section 01300 B. Caulking and Sealing - Section 07900 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. B. Field Quality Control: Apply each type of finish required on a representative area or room for approval of color, texture, quality and workmanship. After approval, these applications shall serve as standard of quality for entire project. C. Reference Standards: ASTM C475-81 Spec. for Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction Fed. Spec. Equivalents ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI) follow: 2416 Ultra -Hide Durus Ext. Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish TT-P-19C (2) Paint, Acrylic Emulsion: Exterior 4328 Devshield Int/Ext Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel TT-E-489G Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (For Exterior and Interior Surfaces) 1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Int. Wall & Trim Enamel TT-E-50913 (2) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior, Semi -gloss, White and Tints 1120 Ultra -Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoater E-543A(1) Enamel, Interior, Undercoat, Tints and White 1120 Ultra -Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoater TT-E-545B (1) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior -Undercoat Flat, Tints and White 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer TT-P-645A Primer, Paint, Alkyd Type 1030 Ultra -Hide PVA Int. Primer -Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer Flat TT-P-650C (1) Primer Coating, Latex Base, Interior White (For Gypsum Wallboard) 3230 Ultra -Hide Buildtex Medium Texture TTC-555-5 (1) Coating Textured (For Interior and Exterior Masonry Surfaces) PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 1.4 SAMPLES AND COLORS: 0201 A. Colors, including deep tomes, are scheduled. Number of colors to be used on job will be as -- scheduled. B. Prepare two 12" x 12" samples of each color and sheen selected, on properly prepared paint -out cards or hardboard. Approved samples shall remain at project site. C. Prepare stained wood samples on type and quality of wood specified for use on project. D. Submit 12" x 12" samples of drywall textures. E. Submit paint schedule in accordance with submittal requirements of Section 01300. List each surface and its proposed paint products and systems. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Submit substitute paint schedule listing each surface and its proposed products. B. Submit complete supporting data, specifications, and identifying numbers of each proposed product. C. Do not order or deliver materials until Architect's approval is obtained. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.7 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION: A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adequate finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.8 EXTRA PAINT: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color of latex paint used, and two (2) quarts of each enamel color used PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers — Textured Coatings 1. Thoros Product Thorocoat 2. Sonneborne Product Hydrocide Super Color Coat. 3. TCA Product Tex -Coate 600 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by ICI Paint Center (ICI), unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pittsburgh Paints, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Cook and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 s� B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless Otherwise specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. 2.3 MIXING AND TINTING: a� A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed be manufacturer: Do not exceed thinning directions. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. Compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and topping compound, ASTM C475-70. B. Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM C475-70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finish for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.2 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is below 50 deg. F. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before painting. D. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as balance of doors after they are fitted. Seal top, bottom, opening and hardware recesses immediately after hanging doors. E. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. F. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60 deg. F. for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. G. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. H. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. I. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PAINTING REQUIREMENTS: A. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment Machinery Gray unless otherwise noted. Paint pipes and conduits to match color of adjacent surfaces unless otherwise directed by Architect. B. Metal surfaces delivered with prime coat shall have abrasions touched up and finish coats applied as specified. C. Touch up abrasions in factory finishes. D. Paint exposed underside of cast iron sinks and fixture supporting members or structure with 2 coats of enamel. E. Paint galvanized ducts exposed to view on interior of building, including mechanical spaces, in accordance with painting schedule for galvanized metal. F. Paint air conditioning grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers and speaker grilles to match color of ` adjacent surfaces. G. Paint exposed conduit supports, clamps, hangers, and exposed conduit and boxes in accordance with painting schedule. H. Paint panelboards and other cabinets in accordance with painting schedule to match color of adjacent surfaces, when located in finished spaces other than closets or mechanical/electrical rooms. I. Paint surfaces inside of ducts, diffusers and other mechanical openings which are exposed to view flat black. J. Do not paint nameplates on equipment or labels on doors and frames. 3.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: A. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy spots with 2 lb. cut shellac priming. B. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects with putty after first coat. Color to match finish. C. Sand woodwork smooth and clean surface before finishing. D. Back -prime interior trim and cabinetry with tinted wood primer before installation. E. Paste wood filler, applied on open grain wood when "set" shall be wiped across grain of wood, then with grain to secure a clean surface. F. Coat surfaces to be stained with a uniform coat of stain and wipe excess off. G. Sand enamel or varnish finish on wood between coats using a fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth finish. Thoroughly clean surfaces. H. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil, or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch up with primer. I. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson chemical Co., Detroit, Mich. J. Fill scratches, cracks, and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 K. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch- up factory prime coat before applying first coat. L. Touch-up shop coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. M. All gypsum beard surfaces to receive ceramic tile or vinyl wall fabric shall be primed and sealed before application of adhesive. Primer shall be shellac unless otherwise recommended by adhesive manufacturer. N. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. O. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.5 JOINT TREATMENT A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. Pre -fill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. Treat joints of surfaces to receive ceramic tile or other finish wall material. Treat joints of all exposed face layers. 3.6 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will not be allowed. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Adjust transparent (natural) finishes to obtain matching appearance between doors and casework. H. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by Architect or his designated representative before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat, at no additional cost. I. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.7 CLEANING AND PATCHING: A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 3.8 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING: 0201 EXTERIOR METAL First Coat: ICI - 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank &Structural Primer Second Coat: ICI - 2406 Dulux Professional Ext. 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish —or- 4328 Devshield Int./Ext. Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel Third Coat: ICI - 2406 Dulux Professional Ext. 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish —or- 4328 Devshield Int./Ext. Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel NOTE: First coat not required on items delivered with shop coat applied. Use this finish on all exterior ferrous metal including exposed structural steel. EXTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL First Coat: ICI - 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer Second Coat: ICI - 2406 Dulux Professional Ext. 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish —or- 4328 Devshield Int./Ext. Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel Third Coat: ICI - 2406 Dulux Professional Ext. 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish —or- 4328 Devshield Int./Ext. Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel INTERIOR METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH First Coat: ICI - 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer Second Coat: ICI - 1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel Third Coat: ICI - 1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel NOTE: Use this finish for all interior ferrous metal including exposed structural steel except where other finishes are required. First coat not required on items delivered with prime coat. INTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH First Coat: ICI - 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer Second Coat: ICI -1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel Third Coat: ICI - 1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel INTERIOR WOODWORK -TRANSPARENT FINISH First Coat: ICI — 1700 Woodpride Oil Wood Finishing Stain Second Coat: ICI —1902 Woodpride Int. Polyurethane Satin Varnish Third Coat: ICI —1902 Woodpride Int. Polyurethane Satin Varnish Fourth Coat: ICI —1902 Woodpride Int. Polyurethane Satin Varnish NOTE: Use this finish for all hardwood trim, doors, millwork, etc., noted to have transparent finish. INTERIOR WOODWORK- PAINTED (ENAMEL) FINISH First Coat: ICI — 1020 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Primer Wood Undercoater Second Coat: ICI —1512 Ultra -Hide Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel Third Coat: ICI —1512 Ultra -Hide Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel NOTE: Use this finish for all white pine and trim, millwork, etc., noted to have painted finish. INTERIOR WOODWORK - Cabinet Interiors not exposed to view. One coat Lacquer Clear Gloss, tinted as directed. INTERIOR DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION (Gypsum) - LATEX FINISH First coat: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Int. Flat latex Second Coat: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Int. Flat latex NOTE: Use this finish at all exposed gypsum beard unless otherwise scheduled. All cemented and taped joints shall be spot primed with Vapex Wall Primer. Before proceeding with the above specifications provide over the surface a uniform texture as approved by the Architect before painting. INTERIOR DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION (Gypsum) - ENAMEL FINISH First Coat: ICI-1030 Ultra -Hide PVA Int. Primer -Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer Second Coat: ICI-1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint —or- 1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Int. Wall & Trim Enamel Third Coat: ICI-1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint —or- 1516 Ultra- Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Int. Wall & Trim Enamel NOTE: Use this finish at exposed gypsum board where scheduled on the drawings. All cemented and taped joints shall be spot primed with Vapex Wall Primer. Before proceeding with the above specifications provide over the surface a uniform texture as approved by the Archtiect before painting. INTERIOR CONCRETE BLOCK - LATEX FINISH First Coat: ICI-3010 Ultra -Hide Int./Ext. Vinyl Acrylic Block Filler Second Coat: ICI-1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint NOTE: A full and uniform coverage will be required or additional coats applied. Use latex paint unless PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 6 —. s Facilities Security Project 0201 otherwise scheduled on the plans. INTERIOR CONCRETE BLOCK - ENAMEL FINISH First Coat: ICI-3010 Ultra -Hide Int./Ext. Vinyl Acrylic Block Filler Second Coat: ICI-1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel NOTE: Use enamel paint where scheduled on the plans. INTERIOR INSULATED PIPE COVERINGS First Coat: ICI-1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat Int. Wall Paint Second Coat: ICI-1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat Int. Wall Paint INTERIOR CONCRETE BASES FOR EQUIPMENT Two (2) Coats: ICI-3118 Ultra -Hide Int./Exr. Polyurathane Floor Enamel INTERIOR WIRE MESH PARTITIONS AND DOORS .•+, One Coat: ICI-4218 Devflex D-T-M Gloss Int./Ext Waterborne Enamel NOTE: A full and uniform coverage will be required or additional coats applied. PIPES, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT -ENAMEL FINISH Finish in accordance with specifications for Interior Galvanized Metal and Interior Metal. 3.9 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING - REMODEL WORK (where noted on Drawings or required by other work): EXTERIOR METAL - ENAMEL FINISH REMODEL WORK First : Remove loose paint, scale and dust. Prime where metal is exposed with ICI-Devguard 4160 Mult-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer .; Second: ICI-2406 Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish —or- 4328 Devshield Int./Ext Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel INTERIOR METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Remove grease, rust, scale and dust. Prime where metal is exposed with ICI-Devguard 4160 Mult-Purpose Tank &Structural Primer Second: ICI-1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel —or- 1516 Ultra -Hide �., Alkyd Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel INTERIOR WOODWORK - NATURAL FINISH TO REMAIN - REMODEL WORK First: Sand surfaces with 4/0 sandpaper. Second & Third: ICI-1902 Woodpride Int. Polyurethane Satin Varnish INTERIOR WOODWORK - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Sand with 4/0 sandpaper Second & Third ICI-1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall Paint —or- 1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Interior Wall &Trim Enamel DRYWALL (Gypsum) CONSTRUCTION - LATEX FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Clean and patch surfaces Second: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvette Matte Interior Flat Latex Third: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvette Matte Interior Flat Latex NOTE: Use this finish at all exposed gypsum board unless otherwise scheduled. DRYWALL (Gypsum) CONSTRUCTION - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: (new work) ICI-1000 Dulux Ultra Latex Basecoat Primer Second: ICI-1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel —or- 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint NOTE: A uniform coverage will be required or additional coats shall be applied. Use enamel paint where scheduled on plans. INTERIOR CONCRETE BLOCK - LATEX FINISH - REMODEL WORK First Coat: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvette Matte Interior Flat Latex Second Coat: ICI-1200 Dulux Professional Velvette Matte Interior Flat Latex INTERIOR MASONRY - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: (new work) ICI-1000 Dulux Ultra Latex Basecoat Primer Second: Second: ICI-1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Wall & Trim Enamel —or- 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint NOTE: A uniform coverage will be required, or additional coats shall be applied. Use enamel paint where scheduled on plans. INTERIOR INSULATED PIPE COVERINGS- REMODEL WORK First: Clean surfaces First Coat: ICI-1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat Int. Wil Paint NOTE: A full and uniform coverage will be required or additional coats applied. PIPES, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK Clean surfaces and finish in accordance with specifications for interior metal. End of Schedule s PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 7 I Facilities Security Project 0201 1 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13710 PERIMETER SECURITY 19 13720 INTRUSION DETECTION 16 13760 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 15 DIVISION IS -MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 7 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 7 15081 DUCT INSULATION 3 15083 PIPE INSULATION 3 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 6 15763 FAN -COIL UNITS 4 15815 METAL DUCTS 4 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 3 15861 AIR FILTERS 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 4 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 6 16140 WIRING DEVICES 2 16442 PANELBOARDS 4 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 3 04 Its_ 09..."`f-ob Facilities Security Project 0201 4 SECTION 13710 - PERIMETER SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter protection with access control and microwave systems integrated into a single perimeter control, detection and alarm system._ 2. Responsibility for integrating electronic and electrical systems and equipment is specified in the following Sections, with Work specified in this Section: a. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." b. Division 13 Section "Intrusion Detection." C. Division 13 Section "Video Surveillance." B. The perimeter security system shall be integrated with the video surveillance and intrusion detection systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS .., A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. PIR: Passive infrared. D. RFI: Radio -frequency interference. E. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. F. Protected or Protection Zone: A space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely �.. identified, the sensor or group of sensors assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication link to central -station control unit. G. Standard Intruder. A person who weighs 100 lb or more and whose height is 60 inches or more; dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes unless environmental conditions at the site require protective clothing. !^ H. Standard -Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone. PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page1 Facilities Security Project 1.4 SUBMITTALS 0201 A. Product Data: Components for sensing, detecting, systems integration, and control, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for speck application on this Project. 1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single -line interconnections between components including interconnections between components specified in this Section and those fumished under other Sections. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration. Indicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify networks and control interface devices and media to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. 2. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Detail raceway runs required for perimeter security and for systems integration. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type, and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run. 3. UPS: Sizing calculations. 4. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. Include room layout for central -station control -unit console, terminal cabinet, racks, and UPS. 5. Central -Station Control -Unit Console Layout: At full scale, showing required artwork and device identification. 6. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 7. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. 8. Details of surge -protection devices and their installation. 9. Sensor detection pattems and adjustment ranges. C. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For control panels with factory -applied color finishes. E. Samples for Color Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for control panels. Qualification Data: For security systems integrator. G. Field quality -control test reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For perimeter security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Include data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. Central -station control -unit hardware and software data. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A certified technician accredited by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association and who is an authorized service representative of central -station control -unit manufacturer. PERIMETER SECURITY Section1371012age2 - ram+ Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs for overall system at Project site with eight hours' maximum response time. 0. Security Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced perimeter security equipment supplier who has completed systems integration work for installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of detection devices and central -station control unit and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section f^* "Product Requirements." E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. F. FMG Compliance: FMG-approved and -labeled perimeter security devices and equipment. ., G. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet. 2. Central -Station Control -Unit Hardware: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 3. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Comply with UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor -use equipment. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick. 1.7 WARRANTY o� A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace perimeter security devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page3 Facilities Security Project 2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 0201 A. Local Control Units and Central -Station Control Unit: Supervise system components continuously for normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device or circuit in which deviation has occurred and whether deviation is an alarm or malfunction. B. System Control: Central -station control unit shall directly monitor gate detection devices, perimeter detection units, and connecting wiring. C. Operator Commands: 1. Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command. 2. Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator. 3. Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion -alarm circuits of a specific protected zone. Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator. 4. Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion -alarm circuits of a protected zone. 5. Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone. 6. System Test: Initiate system -wide operational test. 7. Print Reports. D. Timed Control of Central -Station Control Unit: Allow automatically timed "secure" and "access" functions of selected protected zones. E. Automatic Control of Related Systems: Alarm or supervisory signals from certain perimeter security devices control the following functions in related systems: 1. Switch selected lights. 2. Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations. 3. Shift sound system to 'listening mode" and open a signal path to certain system speakers. 4. Switch signal to selected monitor from closed-circuit television camera in vicinity of sensor signaling an alarm. F. Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When central -station control unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and -- trouble conditions in system or a log of past events. G. Maximum Permissible Signal Time Elapse: Two seconds between actuation of any alarm and its indication at central -station control unit. H. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, local control units, and sensors from central -station control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an LED. Maximum permissible elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and indication at central -station control unit is 20 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line. I. Programmed Secure -Access Control: System shall be programmable to automatically change status of various combinations of protected zones between secure and access conditions at scheduled times. Status changes may be preset for repetitive, daily, and weekly; specially scheduled operations may be preset up to a year in advance. Manual secure -access control stations shall override programmed settings. PERIMETER SECURITY Section1371 OPage4 i'^ Facilities Security Project 0201 J. Manual Secure -Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of associated protected zone between secure and access conditions. 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Detection devices and their communication features, connecting wiring, and central -station !^ control unit shall be selected and configured with accessories for full compatibility with the following equipment: 1. Closed Circuit TV Cameras: 13760 Video Surveillance. 2. Duress Alarms: 13720 Intrusion Detection. B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 16 Section 'Transient Voltage Suppression." 2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low -Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. C. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-V RMS injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz. D. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, control units, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper -alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Central -station K control -unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. E. Self -Testing Devices: Automatically test themselves periodically, but not less than once per hour, to verify normal device functioning and alarm initiation capability. Devices transmit test failure to central -station control unit. F. Antimasking Devices: Automatically check operation continuously or at intervals of a minute or less, and use signal -processing logic to detect blocking, masking, jamming, tampering, or other operational dysfunction. Devices transmit detection of operational dysfunction to central -station control unit as an alarm signal. G. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to central -station control unit. H. Remote -Controlled Devices: Individually and remotely adjustable for sensitivity and individually monitored at central -station control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12. C. Exterior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. D. Corrosion Resistant: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page5 Facilities Security Project 2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER 0201 A. Normal System Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, through a locked disconnect device and an isolation transformer in central -station control unit. Central -station control unit shall supply power to all components connected to it, unless otherwise indicated. B. Power Continuity for Central -Station Control Unit: Batteries in power supplies of central -station control units and individual system components shall maintain continuous system operation during outages of both normal and backup ac system supply. 1. Batteries: Rechargeable, valve -regulated, recombinant, sealed, lead -acid type with nominal 10- year life expectancy. Capacity adequate to operate portion of system served, including audible trouble signal devices for up to 4 hours and audible and visual alarm devices under alarm conditions for an additional 10 minutes. 2. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Charger shall recharge fully discharged battery within 24 hours. C. Annunciation: Indicate a change in system condition and switching of system or component to backup power. 2.6 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES A. ]Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Continental Instruments. 3. Corby Industries Inc. 4. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 5. George Risk Industries. 6. Honeywell Inc. 7. International Electronics Inc. 8. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 9. Optex. 10. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 11. Visonic Inc. B. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system -status changes and for displaying system -status and command -related data. C. Key -Operated Switch: Change protected zone between secure and access conditions. 2.7 MICROWAVE INTRUSION DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Perimeter Products, Inc. 2. Racon, Inc. 3. Southwest Microwave, Inc. B. Device Performance: Microwave transmitter establishes an electromagnetic field in an adjustable detection pattern and detects intrusion by monitoring changes in that pattern. 1. Movement Sensitivity: Adjustable, able to detect standard -intruder movement within sensor's detection pattem at any speed between 0.1 to 50 fps. Sensor sensitivity adjustments shall be accessible only when sensor housing is removed, and sensors shall comply with 47 CFR 15. 2. Detection range: 15 to 600 feet. 3. Range Sensitivity: Adjustable for setting area of protection between 15 to 500 feet in range and from 2 to 40 feet in beam diameter. PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page6 - Facilities Security Project 0201 4. Trouble and Tamper: Fully supervised with individually monitored tamper and supervision alarms. s System failure shall result in tamper alarm. System jamming or wrong modulation shall result in supervisory alarm. 5. Activation Indicator. LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test -enabling switch under sensor housing cover. 6. Remote Test: When initiated by central -station control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard -intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an P,., alarm. w C. Environment: Suitable for exterior installation, including signal processors in ambients ranging from minus 30 to plus 158 deg F and in rainfall up to 4 inches per hour. 2.8 AIR QUALITY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Automation Components,lnc. B. Description: The ACl/AQS measure the level of contaminate gases within a controlled space and converts the 0 to 100% contaminate level to a 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal. The AQS may be used as either a controller or transmitter by setting the software with the ACl/AQS Hand Held Calibrator. C. Environment: Suitable for exterior installation, including signal processors, in ambients ranging from 14 to plus 140 deg F. with a operating humidity of 10 to 95% condensing D. System Performance: The signal from the sensor will be sent to the facility energy management system control panel for unit shut down and the also to the integrated security panel for alarm initiation. The supply voltage must be 12 to 30vdc supplied from the security panel. The ACl/AQS-D shall be used for duct mounted configurations. 2.9 LONG-RANGE PIR DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aleph International Corporation. 2. Digital Security Controls, Ltd. 3. Optex. 4. PULNiX America, Inc. 5. Stealth Technologies, Inc. 6. Vision Security, Inc. q PM B. Environment: Suitable for exterior installation, including signal processors, in ambients ranging from minus 30 to plus 150 deg F. C. Device Performance: Detect an interruption of dual4nfrared light beams that link transmitters and receivers. Generate an alarm when signal is interrupted due to presence of an object that interrupts both 4. beams. 1. Sensitivity: Field adjustable to allow adjustment of range from 25 to 500 feet, generating an alarm within 20 to 50 ms when both beams are interrupted. 2. Detection system shall adjust automatically to compensate for weather, including fog, rain, snow, blowing dust, and rapid temperature changes. 3. Motion Detection: Detect standard -intruder movement at rates from 0.1 to 50 fps. 4. Supervision: Generate supervisory alarm if any portion of system is tampered with. r PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page7 Vag Facilities Security Project 0201 5. Remote Test: When initiated by central -station control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard -intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an alarm. 2.10 VIDEO MOTION SENSOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Gyyr, Inc.; an Odetics Company. 2. ICU Security, Inc. 3. Magal Security Systems Ltd. B. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal within a user -defined protected zone. Video inputs shall be composite video as defined in EIA 170. Provide an alarm output for each video input. 1. Detect movement within protected zone of standard intruders wearing clothing with a reflectivity that differs from that of background scene by a factor of 2. Reject all other changes in video signal. 2. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of number of inputs. 3. Controls: a. Number of detection zones. b. Size of detection zones. C. Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone. 4. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack as described in EIA 310-D. 2.11 CENTRAL -STATION CONTROL -UNIT HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. DAQ Electronics, Inc. 3. Gyyr, Inc.; an Odetics Company. 4. Honeywell Inc. — 5. Magal Security Systems Ltd. 6. Mosier Inc. 7. Perimeter Products, Inc. 8. Trentech Division; Norment Industries, Inc. 9. Visonic Inc. B. Microprocessor System: Standard personal computer of modular design. 1. CPU Word Size: 64 bits or larger. 2. Operating Speed: 500 MHz or faster. 3. Memory: 258 MB or more. 4. Ports (Minimum): a. Two USB ports. b. COM 1 and COM 2. C. One enhanced parallel port. _ d. Two serial ports, with adjustable data transmission rates from 9.6 to 57.6 Kbps, selectable in software. 5. Video Card: Supports at least 256 colors at a resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels at a minimum rate ^ of 70 Hz. PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page8 Facilities Security Project 0201 """" C. Monitor: Not less than 17 inches with minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels, noninterlaced, and a maximum dot pitch of 0.28 mm. D. Keyboard: 101 keys, standard commercial type. E. Peripherals: Touch -screen devices for frequently used operator commands such as the following: 1. Help. 2. Acknowledge alarm. 3. Place protected zone in Access. 4. Place protected zone in Secure. 5. Protected zone Test. 6. System Test. 7. Print Reports. 8. Change Operator. 9. Security Lighting Controls. 10. Display Graphics: F. Disk Storage: 1. Hard disk with controller having a maximum average access time of 10 ms, and a disk with at least 60 gb of formatted storage. 2. Floppy Disk: Drive and controller for standard 3-1/2-inch high -density diskettes. 3. Removable Disk Storage: 250 MB (minimum) drive and controller, with 10 diskettes. 4. CD-ROM Drive: 450 (minimum) speed, MB Read -Only data storage, 650 MB recording capacity using CD-R technology, with software and 10 CD-R blank disks and 1 test disk. 5. Modem: 56K, v.90 data/fax with error detection, auto answer/autodial, and call progress detection, suitable for operating on unconditioned voice grade telephone lines. G. Alarm Printer: Listed in UL 1610 and labeled as an integral part of perimeter security system. Dot matrix, with graphics capability, red and black ribbon, and minimum speed of 200 characters per second. Selectable character spacing of 10, 13, or 14 per inch. Tractor drive is suitable for fanfold paper. Furnish 25,000 sheets of printer paper and 12 ribbons. H. Report Printer. Laser printer, minimum 600 dpi resolution, minimum 2 MB of RAM, and printing speed of 8 pages per minute with 100 sheet automatic feed paper cassette. Furnish 2000 sheets of paper and 5 toner cartridges. I. UPS: Comply with Division 16 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of central -station control -unit operation. J. Timing Unit: Solid state, programmable, 365 days. 1. Astronomic Control: For automatic control of light switching at dawn and dusk. 2. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts that provide confirmation signals to system for their on or off status. Software shall interpret such signals, display equipment status, and initiate failure signals. 3. Override Capability: Programmed shutdown of lighting and other equipment shall be overridden by using override push buttons or by entering commands over telephone data links. 2.12 CENTRAL -STATION CONTROL -UNIT SOFTWARE A. Support: 1. Multiuser operator with multiple tasks for each user. p■, 2. Support operation and management of all peripheral devices. 3. File management functions for disk 1/0. 4. Printer spooling. 5. Monitor status of UPS. :._.v PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page9 Facilities Security Project B. Operator Commands: 0201 1. Help. 2. Acknowledge alarm. 3. Place protected zone in Access. 4. Place protected zone in Secure. 5. Protected zone Test. 6. System Test. 7. Print Reports. 8. Change Operator. 9. Security Lighting Controls. 10. Display Graphics: 11. Command Input Errors: Supervise inputs to ensure that they are correct for proper execution. Provide automatic help when a command cannot be executed due to operator input error. C. System Access Control: Define system operator capability and functions through password -protected operations at three operator levels. Allow operator level change only by top-level operators and managers. 1. Activate tamper alarm after three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period. 2. Allow at least 32 passwords. 3. Display operator's name or initials in console's first field. 4. Report: Print operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on system printer at log -on and log - off. Do not display or print passwords. 5. Define and assign passwords for the following: a. System commands. b. Access to system software. C. Access to application software. d. Individual protected zones to be accessed. e. Access to database. D. Alarm -Monitoring Software: Monitor all sensors, central -station control units, and data transmission circuits and notify operator of an alarm condition. Print alarms in red on alarm printer and display on console's text and graphic maps. 1. Alarm Display: a. Display higher -priority alarms first. b. Oldest unacknowledged alarm has highest priority. C. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm is not acknowledgment of any other alarm and may not inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms. d. Type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages. e. Date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence and operator response. f. A unique message field with a width of at least 60 characters for each alarm. Allow operator to edit assignment of messages to a protected zone or sensor. g. 25 secondary messages shall have a field of 4 lines of 60 characters each to allow further information to be entered by operator for each alarm. h. Store most recent 1000 alarms and allow the data to be recalled, but not edited, by operator using the report generator. E. Monitor Display Software: Display text and graphic maps that integrate protected zone status. Use for various components and real-time data. Use uniform color codes on all displays as follows: 1. FLASHING RED to alert operator that a protected zone has gone into alarm or that primary power has failed. 2. RED to alert operator that a protected zone is in alarm and that alarm has been acknowledged. 3. YELLOW to advise operator that a protected zone is in access. 4. GREEN to indicate that a protected zone is secure or that power is on. PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page10 Facilities Security Project 0201 F. System Test Software: Enable operator to initiate a test of entire system or a particular portion of system. Store results of each test for future display, or print them out in report form. G. Report Generator Software: Commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Store reports by type, date, and time and print each on report printer. Provide printer spooling. Generating reports shall not interrupt system operations. Allow operator to select report -generation mode, either periodic automatic or on request. Report headers shall automatically include time and date of printing and name of operator generating the report. Exact format of each report type shall be operator configurable. Allow operator to request, at any time, an immediate printout of any report. 1. Periodic Automatic Report Modes: Allow for specifying, modifying, or inhibiting the report to be 0- generated, time the initial report is to be generated, time interval between reports, end of period, and output peripheral. 2. Alarm Report: Include all alarms recorded by the system over an operator -selectable time. include such information as type of alarm (intrusion, tamper, etc.), type of sensor, location, time, and action "^ taken. 3. System Test Report: This report documents the operational status of all system components following a system test. 4. Access and Secure Report: This report documents all protected zones placed in access condition, time placed in access condition, and time placed in secure condition. 2.13 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM DEVICES A. Manufacturers: �-+ 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Alarm Controls Corporation. 3. Amseco; Division of Kobishi-America, Inc. 4. Edwards Signaling Products. 5. FBII. 6. Gentex Corporation; Fire Protection Group. 7. Honeywell Inc. 8. Potter Electric Signal Company. r* 9. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 10. Wheelock, Inc. S. Bell: UL listed, 10 inches in diameter, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 84 dB at 10 feet from central -station control unit. 1. Enclosure: Weather -resistant steel box equipped with tamper switches on cover and on back of box. C. Siren: 30-W speaker with siren driver, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 103 d13 at 10 feet from central -station control unit. 1. Enclosure: Weather -resistant steel box with tamper switches on cover and on back of box. D. Strobe: Xenon light complying with UL 1638, with a clear polycarbonate lens. 1. Light Output: 115 cd, minimum. 2. Flash Rate: 60 per minute. eON E. Security Fasteners: Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength. 1. Manufacturers: a. Camcar Textron Inc. PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page11 r Facilities Security Project 0201 b. Holo-Krome; a Danaher Corporation. C. Safety Socket Screw Corporation. d. Tamper-Pruf Screws, Inc. 2. Drive System Types: pinned Torx. 3. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners: a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW. 4. Socket Button Head Fasteners: a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW. 5. Socket Head Cap Fasteners: a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 574. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 837, Group 1 CW. 6. Protective Coatings for Heat -Treated Alloy Steel: a. Zinc chromate, ASTM F 1135, Grade 3 or 4; for exterior applications and interior applications where indicated. b. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F 1137, Grade I, or black oxide, unless otherwise indicated. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrostatic Field and Buried, Ported Coaxial Cable Systems Electronics: Precondition at factory by subjecting modules to at least 4 days' operational bum -in at temperatures not less than 140 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of perimeter security. 1. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of perimeter security connections before perimeter security installation. 2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of perimeter security. B. Inspect built-in and cast -in anchor installations, before installing perimeter security, to verify that anchor installations comply with requirements. Prepare inspection reports. 1. Remove and replace anchors where inspections indicate that they do not comply with requirements. Reinspect after repairs or replacements are made. 2. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional anchor installations. Prepare inspection reports. C. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify installation orientation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page12 �" Facilities Security Project 0201 y, 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to inmates, install perimeter security components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project. B. Wiring Method: Install power, signal, and data transmission wire and cable in raceways according to Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and ' Utility Structures" and Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share raceways with any other system. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with perimeter security system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. D. Wires and Cables: 1. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables," unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cable for Low Voltage Control and Signal Circuits: Install unshielded, twisted -pair cable, unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable, according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 4. Computer and Data -Processing Cables: Install according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 5. Television Signal Transmission Cables: Install according to Division 16 Section "Televison Equipment." E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. F. Connections: `Comply with torque -tightening values specified in UL 486A. g G. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at control units, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices they serve. H. Stain -Sensitive Transducer Cable: Attached to fence at 12-inch intervals with be wraps. Electrostatic -Field System: Install field and sense wires on insulators and standoffs on a fence, wall, or roof. Provide intermediate supports recommended in writing by manufacturer as needed for specified performance. J. Buried, Ported Coaxial Cable: Transmitters may be located at one end of parallel coaxial cables, and preamplifier -sensor module may be located at opposite end. Install cable so shield is uniform throughout the length, without twisting or distorting cable during installation. Field -cut cables to exact zone length at the site. To attach data transmission cable to sensing cable, use heat -shrink splice kits approved by manufacturer. Provide sufficient overlap of detector cables to eliminate the possibility of entry between zones. K. Identify components with engraved, laminated -plastic or metal nameplate for central -station control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." " PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page13 Facilities Security Project 3.3 GROUNDING 0201 A. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide 5-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. 1. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. 2. Final Test Notice: Notify Architect at least 10 days in advance of final acceptance testing. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare reports: 1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed. Test all modes of system operation and perimeter security at each detection device. Test for detection of intrusion and for false alarms in each protected zone. Test for false alarms by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns. 3. Electrical Tests: Comply with NFPA 72, Section A-7. Minimum required tests are as follows: a. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. b. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device. C. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Record Drawings. d. Verify that each control unit is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. e. Test signal and data transmission circuits complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for proper signal transmission under open -circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. f. Verify that transient surge -protection devices are installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. g. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at control unit. h. Test both primary and secondary power. Verify, by test, that UPS is capable of operating the system for period and in manner specified. Geophone System Tests: Test each zone at a minimum of two different locations. Test each zone as follows: a. Horizontal Movement: Adjust sensitivity to screen out alarms from wind. PERIMETER SECURITY Section13710Page14 Facilities Security Project 0201 POW b. Vertical Climb: 100 percent detection required. Set count at 3 occurrences within 90- second window. C. Cut Test: 100 percent detection required. Set count at 2 occurrences within 120-second window. d. Set sensitivity to value as low as possible, consistent with reliable detection. e. If performance tests fail, make adjustments to sensors to comply with requirements. Retest failing and adjacent zones to comply with test. rw 5. Strain -Sensitive Cable System Tests: Adjust sensitivity and count control to value as low as possible, consistent with reliable detection. 6. Microwave Perimeter Security System Tests: Adjust sensitivity to value as low as possible, consistent with reliable detection. 7. Long -Range PIR System Tests: Adjust sensitivity and hold time between activity duration to value as low as possible, consistent with reliable detection. ^" D. Report of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. E. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain perimeter security. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3.6 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project - site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting equipment and controls to suit actual conditions. Visits for this purpose shall be in addition to any required by warranty. END OF SECTION 13710 VON, PERIMETER SECURITY Section 13710Page15 Facilities Security Project 0201 a: SECTION 13720 - INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Intrusion detection with multiplexed, modular, microprocessor -based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions. 2. Responsibility for integrating electronic and electrical systems and equipment is specified in the following Sections, with Work specified in this Section: a. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." b. Division 13 Section "Perimeter Security." C. Division 13 Section "Video Surveillance." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LCD: Liquid -crystal display. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. PIR: Passive infrared. D. RFI: Radio -frequency interference. E. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. F. Protected or Protection Zone: A space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely Identified, the sensor or group of sensors assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication link to central -station control unit. G. Standard Intruder. A person who weighs 100 lb or less and whose height is 60 inches or less; dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes. H. Standard -Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ` A. Product Data: Components for sensing, detecting, systems integration, and control, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 1 3720Pagel Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single -line interconnections between components including interconnections between components specified in this Section and those furnished under other Sections. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration. Indicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify networks and control interface devices and media to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. 2. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Detail raceway runs required for intrusion detection and for systems integration. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type, and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run. 3. UPS: Sizing calculations. 4. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. Include room layout for central -station control -unit console, terminal cabinet, racks, and UPS. 5. Central -Station Control -Unit Console Layout: At full scale, showing required artwork and device identification. 6. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 7. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. 8. Details of surge -protection devices and their installation. 9. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges. C. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project, manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For control panels with factory -applied color finishes. E. Samples for Color Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for control panels. F. Qualification Data: For Installer ,intrusion detection systems integrator. G. Field quality -control test reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intrusion detection system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1. Include data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. Central -station control -unit hardware and software data. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Other Information Submittals: 1. Test Plan and Schedule: Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications within 60 days of date of Contract award. 2. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions. 3. Anchor inspection reports documenting inspections of built-in and cast -in anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A certified technician accredited by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association who is an authorized service representative of central -station control -unit manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs for overall system at Project site with eight hours' maximum response time. INTRUSION DETECTION _ Section13720Page2 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced intrusion detection equipment supplier and Installer who has completed systems integration work for installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of detection devices and central -station control units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section r,,,, "Product Requirements." E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. k F. FMG Compliance: FMG-approved and -labeled intrusion detection devices and equipment. G. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet. 2. Central -Station Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 3. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central -station control unit, installed in air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. 4. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non -air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. 5. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90' percent relative humidity, condensing. Comply with UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor -use equipment. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph. 6. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS +ft, 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: r 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 13720Page3 Facilities Security Project 2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 0201 A. Central -Station Control Units: Supervise system components continuously for normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device or circuit in which deviation has occurred and whether deviation is an alarm or malfunction. B. System Control: Central -station control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices, perimeter detection units, and connecting wiring. C. System Control: One or more remote, addressable, local control units shall operate in a multiplexed distributed control system. Local control units shall receive programming by multiplex signal transmission from a central -station control -unit microprocessor and hold data in nonvolatile memory. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after power outage. D. System Control: One or more remote, addressable, local control units shall operate under control of a central -station control -unit microcomputer in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a network. Local control units shall receive programming by multiplexed signal transmission from a central - station control -unit microprocessor or microcomputer and hold data in nonvolatile memory. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after power outage. E. Operator Commands: 1. Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command. 2. Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator. 3. Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion -alarm circuits of a specific protected zone. Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator. 4. Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion -alarm circuits of a protected zone. 5. Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone. 6. System Test: Initiate system -wide operational test. 7. Print Reports. F. Timed Control of Central -Station Control Unit: Allow automatically timed "secure" and "access" functions of selected protected zones. G. Automatic Control of Related Systems: Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices control the following functions in related systems: 1. Switch selected lights. 2. Shift elevator control to a different mode. 3. Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations. 4. Shift sound system to "listening mode" and open a signal path to certain system speakers. 5. Switch signal to selected monitor from closed-circuit television camera in vicinity of sensor signaling an alarm. H. Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When central -station control unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events. Maximum Permissible Signal Time Elapse: Two seconds between actuation of any alarm and its indication at central -station control unit. J. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors from central -station control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page4 t, Facilities Security Project 0201 zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an LED. Maximum permissible f elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and indication at central -station control unit is 20 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line. K. Programmed Secure -Access Control: System shall be programmable to automatically change status of various combinations of protected zones between secure and access conditions at scheduled times. Status changes may be preset for repetitive, daily, and weekly; specially scheduled operations may be preset up to a year in advance. Manual secure -access control stations shall override programmed settings. L. Manual Secure -Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of associated _ protected zone between secure and access conditions. �-+ 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Detection devices and their communication features, connecting wiring, and central -station ., control unit shall be selected and configured with accessories for full compatibility with the following equipment: 1. Microwave, Exrerior long range PIR and Air quality Sensors: 16710 Perimete Security B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression." 2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low -Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. C. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-V RMS injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz. D. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, control units, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper -alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Central -station control -unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. E. Self -Testing Devices: Automatically test themselves periodically, but not less than once per hour, to verify normal device functioning and alarm initiation capability. Devices transmit test failure to central -station control unit. F. Antimasking Devices: Automatically check operation continuously or at intervals of a minute or less, and use signal -processing logic to detect blocking, masking, jamming, tampering, or other operational dysfunction. Devices transmit detection of operational dysfunction to central -station control unit as an alarm signal. G. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to central -station control unit. H. Remote -Controlled Devices: Individually and remotely adjustable for sensitivity and individually monitored at central -station control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 13720Page5 ram* Facilities Security Project 0201 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12. C. Exterior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. D. Corrosion Resistant: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. E. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are accessible to inmates, secure with security fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure. 2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Normal System Power Supply: 120 V. 60 Hz, through a locked disconnect device and an isolation transformer in central -station control unit. Central -station control unit shall supply power to all components connected to it, unless otherwise indicated. B. Power Continuity for Central -Station Control Units: Batteries in power supplies of central -station control units and individual system components shall maintain continuous system operation during outages of both normal and backup ac system supply. 1. Batteries: Rechargeable, valve -regulated, recombinant, sealed, lead -acid type with nominal 10- year life expectancy. Capacity adequate to operate portion of system served, including audible trouble signal devices for up to 4 hours and audible and visual alarm devices under alarm conditions for an additional 10 minutes. 2. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -changing -rate type. Charger shall recharge fully discharged battery within 24 hours. C. Annunciation: Indicate a change in system condition and switching of system or component to backup power. 2.6 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Continental Instruments. 3. Corby Industries Inc. 4. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 5. George Risk Industries. 6. Honeywell Inc. ' 7. International Electronics Inc. 8. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 9. Optex. 10. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 11. Visonic Inc. B. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system -status changes and for displaying system -status and command -related data. C. Key -Operated Switch: Change protected zone between secure and access conditions. on until manually reset at sensor signal processor at central -station control unit. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 13720Page6 r*+ a, Facilities Security Project 0201 ems+ 2.7 DURESS -ALARM SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Ar, 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Detection Systems Inc. 3. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 4. Sentrol. 5. Visonic Inca B. Description: A switch with a shroud over the activating lever that allows an individual to covertly send a duress signal to control unit, with no visible or audible indication when activated. Switch shall lock in activated position until reset with a key. 1. Minimum Switch Rating: 50,000 operations. 2. Foot Rail: Foot activated, floor mounting. 3. Push Button: Finger activated, suitable for mounting on horizontal or vertical surface. 2.8 VIDEO MOTION SENSOR (INTERIOR) A. Manufacturers: PIN 1. Aleph International Corporation. 2. AXCESS Inc. 3. Detection Systems Inc. 4. ICU Security Inc. 5. Mosier Inc. 6. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 7. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 8. Sentrol. 9. Visonic Inc. B. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal within a user -defined protected zone. Video inputs shall be composite video as defined in EIA 170. Provide an alarm output for each video input. 1. Detect movement within protected zone of standard intruders wearing clothing with a reflectivity ..,. that differs from that of background scene by a factor of 2. Reject all other changes in video signal. 2. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of number of inputs. 3. Controls: -* a. Number of detection zones. b. Size of detection zones. C. Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone. 4. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack as described in EIA 310-D. 2.9 CENTRAL -STATION CONTROL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Amseco; Division of Kobishi-America, Inc. 3. DAQ Electronics, Inc. 4. Detection Systems Inc. 5. FBII. 6. Honeywell Inc. .J 7. Magal Security Systems Ltd. 8. Mosier Inc. ' INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page7 r*• Facilities Security Project 0201 9. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 10. Perimeter Products, Inc. 11. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 12. Sentrol. 13. Visonic Inc. B. Description: Panel shall provide supervision of sensors and detection subsystems and their connecting communication links, status control (secure or access) of sensors and detector subsystems, activation of alarms and supervisory and trouble signals, and other indicated functions. C. Construction: Modular, with separate and independent alarm and supervisory system modules. Alarm - initiating protected zone boards shall be plug-in cards. Arrangements that require removal of field wiring for module replacement are not acceptable. D. Comply with UL 609. E. Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and a plain -language identification of protected zone originating the alarm appears on LED or LCD display at central -station control unit. Annunciator panel displays a common alarm light and an audible tone. 1. Alarm activation sounds a bell or siren and strobe. F. Operator Controls: Manual switches and push -to -test buttons that do not require a key to operate. Include the following: 1. Acknowledge alarm. 2. Silence alarm. 3. System reset. 4. LED test. G. Resetting Controls: Prevent resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while alarm or trouble condition persists. H. Timing Unit: Solid state, programmable, 365 days. 1. Astronomic Control: For automatic control of light switching at dawn and dusk. 2. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts that provide confirmation signals to system for their on or off status. Software shall interpret such signals, display equipment status, and initiate failure signals. 3. Override Capability: Programmed shutdown of lighting and other items shall be overridden by using override push buttons or by entering commands over telephone data links. I. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between operator and addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, component status messages, and programming and control menu. 1. Display: LCD, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. J. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between operator at central -station control unit and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and test. 1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into system for testing of sensors. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. K. Protected Zones: Quantity of alarm and supervisory zones as indicated, with capacity for expanding number of protected zones by a minimum of 25 percent. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 13720Page8 ems+ Facilities Security Project 0201 L. Power Supply Circuits: Central -station control units shall provide power for remote power -consuming detection devices. Circuit capacity shall be adequate for at least a 25 percent increase in load. M. UPS: Comply with Division 16 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of central -station control -unit operation. N. Cabinet: Lockable, steel enclosure arranged so operations required for testing, normal operation, and maintenance are performed from front of enclosure. If more than a single cabinet is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, laminated, phenolic - resin nameplate. Lettering on enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch high. Identify, with permanent labels, individual components and modules within cabinets. 2.10 ANNUNCIATOR A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Amseco; Division of Kobishi-America, Inc. 3. DAQ Electronics, Inc. 4. Detection Systems Inc. 5. FBII. 6. Honeywell Inc. 7. Magal Security Systems Ltd. 8. Mosler Inc. 9. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 10. Perimeter Products, Inc. 11. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 12. Sentrol. 13. Visonic Inc. B. Power and Signal Inputs: From central -station control unit. C. Visual Displays: Modular -lighted type with displays as indicated and engraved legend for each protected zone annunciated. D. Light Source: Duplicate LEDs for "alarm signals," visible at a distance of 30 feet. E. Signals Annunciated: "Secure," "access," and "alarm" shall be distinctly indicated for each protected zone by green, yellow, and red displays, respectively. Annunciate alarm condition by flashing light and steady alarm tone until silence -reset switch is operated. F. Audible Alarm: Unit mounted within annunciator cabinet; sounds for alarm conditions and is silenced by silence -reset switch on unit. Alarm shall sound again when condition is normalized until silence -reset switch is reset. G. Silence -Reset Switch: Resets annunciator to normal condition after alarm condition is restored. ''" H. Test Switch: Tests annunciator LEDs. I. Cabinet: Two hinged doors, one behind the other. Metal outer door frame with minimum 1/4-inch- thick, clear acrylic vision lite. Steel inner door with mounting surface for annunciator modules. Both doors shall have flush tumbler locks and tamper switches. Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." 1. Graphics: Integrate LED displays with graphic display panel to form a graphic annunciator. r+ J. UPS: Comply with Division 16 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of annunciator operation. INTRUSION DETECTION Sectionl3720Page9 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.11 CENTRAL -STATION CONTROL -UNIT HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Alarm Controls Corporation. 3. Gyyr, Inc.; an Odetics Company. 4. Honeywell Inc. 5. Magal Security Systems Ltd. 6. Mosier Inc. 7. Trentech Division; Norment Industries, Inc. 8. Visonic Inc. B. Microprocessor System: Standard personal computer of modular design. 1. CPU Word Size: 64 bits or larger. 2. Operating Speed: 500 MHz or faster. 3. Memory: 258 MB or more. 4. Ports (Minimum): a. Two USB ports. b. COM 1 and COM 2. C. One enhanced parallel port. d. Two serial ports, with adjustable data transmission rates from 9.6 to 57.6 Kbps, selectable in software. 5. Video Card: Supports at least 256 colors at a resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels at a minimum rate of 70 Hz. C. Monitor: Not less than 17 inches with minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels, noninterlaced, and a maximum dot pitch of 0.28 mm. D. Keyboard: 101 keys, standard commercial type. E. Peripherals: Touch -screen device for frequently used operator commands such as the following: 1. Help. 2. Acknowledge alarm. 3. Place protected zone in Access. 4. Place protected zone in Secure. 5. Protected zone Test. 6. System Test. 7. Print Reports. 8. Change Operator. 9. Security Lighting Controls. 10. Display Graphics: F. Disk Storage: 1. Hard disk with controller having a maximum average access time of 10 ms, and a disk with at least 60 gb of formatted storage. 2. Floppy Disk: Drive and controller for standard 3-1/2-inch high -density diskettes. 3. Removable Disk Storage: 250 MB (minimum) drive and controller, with 10 diskettes. 4. CD-ROM Drive: 450 (minimum) speed, 650 MB Read -Only data storage, 650 MB recording capacity using CD-R technology, with software and 10 CD-R blank disks and 1 test disk. 5. Modem: 56K, v.90 datalfax with error detection, auto answer/autodial, and call progress detection, suitable for operating on unconditioned voice grade telephone lines. G. Alarm Printer: Listed in UL 1610 and labeled as an integral part of intrusion detection system. Dot matrix with graphics capability, red and black ribbon, with minimum speed of 200 characters per second. INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page10 Facilities Security Project 0201 I r Selectable character spacing of 10, 13, or 14 per inch. Tractor drive is suitable for fanfold paper. Furnish 25,000 sheets of printer paper and 12 ribbons. H. Report Printer: Laser printer, minimum 600 dpi resolution, minimum 2 MB of RAM, printing speed of 8 pages per minute with 100 sheet automatic feed paper cassette. Furnish 2000 sheets of paper and 5 toner cartridges. I. UPS: Comply with Division 16 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply" UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of central -station control -unit operation. 2.12 CENTRAL -STATION CONTROL -UNIT SOFTWARE A. Support: 1. Multiuser operator with multiple tasks for each user. 2. Support operation and management of all peripheral devices. 3. File management functions for disk 1/0. 4. Printer spooling. 5. Monitor status of UPS. B. Operator Commands: 1. Help. 2. Acknowledge alarm. 3. Place protected zone in Access. 4. Place protected zone in Secure. 5. Protected zone Test. 6. System Test. 7. Print Reports. 8. Change Operator. 9. Security Lighting Controls. 10. Display Graphics: 11. Command Input Errors: Supervise inputs to ensure that they are correct for proper execution. Provide automatic help when a command cannot be executed due to operator input error. C. System Access Control: Define system operator capability and functions through password -protected operations at three operator levels. Allow operator level change only by top-level operators and managers. 1. Activate tamper alarm after three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period. 2. Allow at least 32 passwords. 3. Display operator's name or initials in console's first field. 4. Report: Print operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on system printer at log -on and log - off. Do not display or print passwords. 5. Define and assign passwords for the following: a. System commands. b. Access to system software. C. Access to application software. d. Individual protected zones to be accessed. e. Access to database. D. Alarm -Monitoring Software: Monitor all sensors, central -station control units, UPS, and data transmission circuits and notify operator of an alarm condition. Print alarms in red on alarm printer and display on console's text and graphic maps. 1. Alarm Display: INTRUSION DETECTION Sectionl3720Pagell r Facilities Security Project 0201 a. Display higher -priority alarms first. b. Oldest unacknowledged alarm has highest priority. C. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm is not acknowledgment of any other alarm and may not inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms. d. Type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages. e. Date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence and operator response. f. A unique message field with a width of at least 60 characters for each alarm. Allow operator to edit assignment of messages to a protected zone or sensor. g. 25 secondary messages shall have a field of 4 lines of 60 characters each to allow further information to be entered by operator for each alarm. h. Store most recent 1000 alarms and allow the data to be recalled, but not edited, by operator using the report generator. E. Monitor Display :Software: Display text and graphic maps that integrate protected zone status. Use for various components and real-time data. Use uniform color codes on all displays as follows: 1. FLASHING RED to alert operator that a protected zone has gone into alarm or that primary power has failed. 2. RED to alert operator that a protected zone is in alarm and that alarm has been acknowledged. 3. YELLOW to advise operator that a protected zone is in access. 4. GREEN to indicate that a protected zone is secure or that power is on. F. System Test Software: Enable operator to initiate a test of entire system or a particular portion of system. Store results of each test for future display, or print them out in report form. G. Report Generator Software: Commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Store reports by type, date, and time and print each on report printer. Provide printer spooling. Generating reports shall not interrupt system operations. Allow operator to select report -generation mode, either periodic automatic or on request. Report headers shall automatically include time and date of printing and name of operator generating the report Exact format of each report type shall be operator configurable. Allow operator to request, at any time, an immediate printout of any report. 1. Periodic Automatic Report Modes: Allow for specifying, modifying, or inhibiting the report to be generated, time the initial report is to be generated, time interval between reports, end of period, and output peripheral. 2. Alarm Report: Include all alarms recorded by the system over an operator -selectable time. Include such information as type of alarm (intrusion, tamper, etc.), type of sensor, location, time, and action taken. 3. System Test Report: This report documents the operational status of all system components following a system test. 4. Access and Secure Report: This report documents all protected zones placed in access condition, time placed in access condition, and time placed in secure condition. 2.13 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. ADEMCO Group. 2. Alarm Controls Corporation. 3. Amseco; Division of Kobishi-America, Inc. 4. Edwards Signaling Products. _ 5. Gentex Corporation; Fire Protection Group. 6. Potter Electric Signal Company: 7. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 8. Wheelock, Inc. Bell: Central -station control unit 10 inches in diameter, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 84 dB at 10 feet from central -station control unit. INTRUSION DETECTION Section 1 3720Pagel 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Enclosure: Weather -resistant steel box equipped with tamper switches on cover and on back of box. C. Siren: 30-W speaker with siren driver, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 103 dB at 10 feet from central -station control unit. I. Enclosure: Weather -resistant steel box with tamper switches on cover and on back of box. D. Strobe: Xenon light complying with UL 1638, with a clear polycarbonate lens. 1. Light Output: 115 cd, minimum. 2. Flash Rate: 60 per minute. E. Security Fasteners: Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength. 1. Manufacturers: a. Camcar Textron Inc. b. Holo-Krome; a Danaher Corporation. C. Safety Socket Screw Corporation. PION d. _ _ Tamper-Pruf Screws, Inc. 2. Drive System Types: Pinned Torx-Plus. 3. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners: a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW. 4. Socket Button Head Fasteners: a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. r,. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW. 5. Socket Head Cap Fasteners: ell a. Heat -treated alloy steel, ASTM F 574. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F 837, Group 1 CW. 6. Protective Coatings for Heat -Treated Alloy Steel: a. Zinc chromate, ASTM F 1135, Grade 3 or 4 for exterior applications and interior applications where indicated. b. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F 1137, Grade 1, or black oxide, unless otherwise indicated. t PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION rya A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of intrusion detection. 1. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of intrusion detection connections before intrusion detection installation. 2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of intrusion detection. r INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page13 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Inspect built-in and cast -in anchor installations, before installing intrusion detection, to verify that anchor installations comply with requirements. Prepare inspection reports. 1. Remove and replace anchors where inspections indicate that they do not comply with requirements. Reinspect after repairs or replacements are made. 2. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional anchor installations. Prepare inspection reports. C. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify installation orientation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Comply with UL 681. B. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to inmates, install intrusion detection components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project. Provide stainless -steel security fasteners in stainless -steel materials. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in interior hollow gypsum board partitions where cable may be used. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. C. Wiring Method: Cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible. D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. E. Wires and Cables: 1. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables," unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Install unshielded, twisted -pair cable, unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable, according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 4. Computer and Data -Processing Cables: Install according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 5. Television Signal Transmission Cables: Install according to Division 16 Section "Televison Equipment." F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page14 Facilities Security Project 0201 G. Connections: Comply with torque -tightening values specified in UL 486A. H. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at control units, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such, items near devices they serve. I. Identify components with engraved, laminated -plastic or metal nameplate for central -station control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide 5-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare reports: ems* 1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed. Test all ,r- modes of system operation and intrusion detection at each detection device. Test for detection of intrusion and for false alarms in each protected zone. Test for false alarms by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns. 3. Electrical Tests: Comply with NFPA 72, Section A-7. Minimum required tests are as follows: a. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. b. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device. C. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit resistance ""' with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Record Drawings. d. Verify that each control unit is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. e. Test signal. and data transmission circuits complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for proper signal transmission under open -circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. f. Verify that transient surge -protection devices are installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. g. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at control unit. h. Test both primary and secondary power. Verify, by test, that UPS is capable of operating the system for period and in manner specified. C. Report of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. D. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily completed. urror�r�wnrTrnrr�w Sectionl3720Page15 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain intrusion detection. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3.7 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project - site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting equipment and controls to suit actual conditions. Visits for this purpose shall be in addition to any required by warranty. END OF SECTION 13720 INTRUSION DETECTION Section13720Page16 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 13760 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes video surveillance system consisting of cameras, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment. B. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with monitoring and control system specified in Division 13 Section "Perimeter Security, Intrusion Detection and Security Access" that specifies systems integration. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AGC: Automatic gain control. B. B/W: Black and white. C. CCD: Charge -coupled device. D. MPEG: Moving picture experts group. E. NTSC: National Television System Committee. F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single -line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes. 2. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements. 3. UPS: Sizing calculations. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring, and grounding. C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760111age1 0 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that cameras, camera -supporting equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following: Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Field quality -control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control -station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access control system shall comply with SIA TVAC. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central -station control unit, installed in air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. 3. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non -air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section 1 3760Page2 r"+ Facilities Security Project 0201 { 4. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as w, specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick. NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. 5. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70. 6. Corrosive Environment: System components subjected to corrosive fumes, vapors, and wind - driven salt spray in coastal zones. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures. 7. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high -risk areas where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control -station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product r� selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Video signal format shall comply with the NTSC standard composite video, interlaced. Composite video signal termination shall be 75 ohms. B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More:. Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression." 2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low -Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 'Transient Voltage Suppression" as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. C. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper -alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control -station, control -unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section 13760Page3 r Facilities Security Project 2.3 STANDARD CAMERAS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. AXCESS Inc. 5. CBC (America) Corp. 6. COP -USA. 7. Crest Electronics, Inc. 8. Elbex Limited. 9. ELMO. 10. EverFocus Electronics Corp. 11. GENWAC, Inc.; a division of Watec Co. Ltd. 12. Hitachi Visual Technologies. 13. Hunt Electronics USA, Inc. 14. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 15. JVC Professional Products. 16. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 17. Merit LI-Lin Ent. Co., Ltd. 18. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 19. Pelco. 20. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 21. Pixera Corporation. 22. Safety Vision. 23. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 24. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 25. SaramNcom, Inc. 26. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 27. Silent Witness Enterprises Ltd. 28. Telpix Inc. 29. Toshiba Security Products. 30. Trinus Systems, Inc. 31. Ultrak, Inc. 32. Veltek International, Inc. 33. Vicon Industries, Inc. 34. Videology Imaging Solutions, Inc. 35. Visiontech. 36. Watec America Corporation. B. Color Camera: 0201 1. Comply with UL 639. 2. Pickup Device: CCD interline transfer, 380,000 771(H) by 492(V) pixels. 3. Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines. 4. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: Not less than 50 dB, with the camera AGC off. 5. With AGC, manually selectable on or off. 6. Sensitivity: Camera shall provide usable images in low -light conditions, delivering an image at a scene illumination of 10 lux at Insert f-stop of lens, with the camera AGC off. 7. Sensitivity: Camera shall deliver 1-V peak -to -peak video signal at the minimum specified light level. The illumination for the test shall be with lamps rated at approximately 2200-K color temperature, and with the camera AGC off. 8. Manually selectable modes for backlight compensation or normal lighting. 9. Scanning Synchronization: Determined by external synch over the coaxial cable. Camera shall revert to internally generated synchronization on loss of external synch signal. 10. White Balance: Auto -tracing white balance, with manually settable fixed balance option. 11. Motion Detector. Built-in digital. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section 13760Page4 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Automatic Color Dome Camera: Assembled and tested as a manufactured unit, containing a dome assembly, color camera, motorized pan and tilt, zoom lens, and receiver/driver. 1. Comply with UL 639. 2. Pickup Device: CCD interline transfer, 380,000 768(H) by 494(V) pixels. 3. Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines. 4. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: Not less than 50 dB, with the camera AGC off. ,., 5. With AGC, manually selectable on or off. 6. Sensitivity: Camera shall provide usable images in low -light conditions, delivering an image at a scene illumination of 10 lux at, with the camera AGC off. 7. Sensitivity: Camera shall deliver 1-V peak -to -peak video signal at the minimum specified light level. The illumination for the test shall be with lamps rated at approximately 2200-K color temperature, and with the camera AGC off. 8. Manually selectable modes for backlight compensation or normal lighting. 9. Pan and Tilt: Direct -drive motor, 360-degree rotation angle, and 180-degree tilt angle. Pan -and -lift speed shall be variable controlled by operator. Movement from preset positions shall be not less than 300 degrees per second. 10. Preset positioning: 8 user -definable scenes, each allowing 16-character titles. Controls shall include the following: a. In "sequence mode," camera shall continuously sequence through preset positions, with dwell time and sequencing under operator control. b. Motion detection shall be available at each camera position. "? C. Up to four preset positions may be selected to be activated by an alarm. Each of the alarm positions may be programmed to output a response signal. 11. Scanning Synchronization: Determined by external synch over the coaxial cable. Camera shall revert to internally generated synchronization on loss of external synch signal. 12. White Balance: Auto -tracing white balance, with manually settable fixed balance option. 13. Motion Detector. Built-in digital. 14. Dome shall support multiplexed control communications using coaxial cable recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 LENSES A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. CBC (America) Corp. 5. COP -USA. 6. Crest Electronics, Inc. 7. ElbexLimited. 8. GENWAC, Inc.; a division of Watec Co. Ltd. 9. Hitachi Visual Technologies. 10. Hunt Electronics USA, Inc. 11. Kalatel Inc.; an Intedogix company. 12. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 13. Pelco. 14. Rainbow CCTV; International Space Optics, S.A. 15. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 16. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 17. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 18. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 19. Tamron USA, Incorporated; Industrial Optics Division. 20. Telpix Inc. 21. Ultrak, Inc. 22. Veltek International, Inc. 23. Vicon Industries, Inc. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page5 Facilities Security Project 0201 24. Videology Imaging Solutions, Inc. 25. Watec America Corporation. B. Description: Optical -quality, coated optics, designed specifically for video surveillance applications, and matched to specified camera. Provide color -corrected lenses with color cameras. 1. Auto -Iris Lens: Electrically controlled iris with circuit set to maintain a constant video level in varying lighting conditions. 2. Fixed Lenses: With calibrated focus ring. 3. Zoom Lenses: Motorized, remote -controlled units, rated as "quiet operating." Features include the — following: a. Electrical Leads: Filtered to minimize video signal interference. b. Motor Speed: Variable. C. Lens shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position of specific scenes. 2.5 POWER SUPPLIES A. Power Supplies: Low -voltage power supplies matched for voltage and current requirements of cameras and accessories, type as recommended by camera, infrared illuminator, and lens manufacturer. 1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2.6 INFRARED ILLUMINATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Merit Li -Lin Ent. Co., Ltd. 2. Rainbow CCTV; International Space Optics, S.A. 3. Ultrak, Inc. 4. Visiontech. 5. Watec America Corporation. B. Description: Lighting fixtures that emit light only in the infrared spectrum, suitable for use with cameras indicated, for nighttime surveillance, without emitting visible light. 1. Field -Selectable Beam Patterns: Narrow, medium, and wide. 2. Rated Lamp Life: More than 8000 hours 3. Power Supply: 120-V ac. C. Area Coverage: Illumination to 150 feet in a narrow beam pattern. D. Exterior housings shall be suitable for same environmental conditions as associated camera. 2.7 CAMERA -SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 3. CBC (America) Corp. 4. COP -USA. 5. Crest Electronics, Inc. 6. ElbexLimited. 7. ELMO. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page6 Facilities Security Project 0201 611 R'* 8. EverFocus Electronics Corp. 9. GENWAC, Inc.; a division of Watec Co. Ltd. 10. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 11. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 12. Merit Li -Lin Ent. Co., Ltd. 13. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 14. Pelco. 15. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 16. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 17. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 18. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 19. Telpix Inc. 20. Ultrak, Inc. 21. Veltek International, Inc. 22. Vicon Industries, Inc. 23. Video Mount Products. 24. Videolarm. 25. Visiontech. 26. Wren Associates Limited. S. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported times a minimum safety factor of two. C. Pan Units: Motorized automatic -scanning units arranged to provide remote -controlled manual and automatic camera panning action and equipped with matching mounting brackets. 1. Scanning Operation: Silent, smooth, and positive. 2. Stops: Adjustable without disassembly, to limit the scanning arc. D. Pan -and -Tilt Units: Motorized units arranged to provide remote -controlled aiming of cameras with smooth and silent operation and equipped with matching mounting brackets. 1. Panning Rotation: 0 to 355 degrees, with adjustable stops. 2. Tilt Movement: 90 degrees, plus or minus 5 degrees, with adjustable stops. 3. Speed: 12 degrees per second in both horizontal and vertical planes. 4. Wiring: Factory prewired for camera and zoom lens functions and pan -and -tilt power and control. 5. Built-in encoders or potentiometers for position feedback, and thermostat -controlled heater. 6. Pan -and -tilt unit shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position of a specific scene. E. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported and mounting conditions. Include manual pan -and -tilt adjustment. F. Protective Housings for Fixed and Movable Cameras: Steel or 6061 T6 aluminum enclosures with internal camera mounting and connecting provisions that are matched to camera/lens combination and mounting and installing arrangement of camera to be housed. 1. Tamper switch on access cover sounds an alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Central -control unit shall identify tamper alarms and indicate location in alarm display. Tamper switches and central -control unit are specified in Division 13 Section "Intrusion Detection." 2. Camera Viewing Window: Lexan window, aligned with camera lens. 3. Duplex Receptacle: Internally mounted. 4. Alignment Provisions: Camera mounting shall provide for field aiming of camera and permit removal and reinstallation of camera lens without disturbing camera alignment. 5. Built-in thermostat -activated heater and blower units. Units shall be automatically controlled so the environmental limits of the camera equipment are not exceeded. 6. With sun shield that does not interfere with normal airflow around the housing. 7. Mounting bracket and hardware for wall or ceiling mounting of the housing. Bracket shall be of same material as the housing; mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. ` VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page7 rr Facilities Security Project 2.8 2.9 0201 8. Finish: Housing and mounting bracket shall be factory finished using manufacturer's standard finishing process suitable for the environment. MONITORS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. CBC (America) Corp. 5. COP -USA. 6. Crest Electronics, Inc. 7. ElbexLimited. 8. ELMO. 9. EverFocus Electronics Corp. 10. GENWAC, Inc.; a division of Watec Co. Ltd. 11. Hitachi Visual Technologies. 12. Hunt Electronics USA, Inc. 13. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 14. JVC Professional Products. 15. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 16. Merit Li -Lin Ent. Co., Ltd. 17. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 18. Pelco. 19. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 20. Rainbow CCTV; International Space Optics, S.A. 21. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 22. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 23. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 24. Tatung Company of America, Inc. 25. Telpix Inc. 26. Toshiba Security Products. 27, Trinus Systems, Inc. 28. Ultrak, Inc. 29. Veltek International, Inc. 30. Vicon Industries, Inc. B. Color: 1. Metal cabinet units designed for continuous operation. 2. Screen Size (Diagonal Dimension): 3. Horizontal Resolution: 300 lines. 4. Minimum Front Panel Devices and Controls: Power switch, power -on indicator, and brightness, contrast, color, and tint controls. 5. Degaussing: Automatic. 6. Mounting: Single, 14-inch, vertical, EIA 19-inch electronic equipment rack or cabinet complying with EIA 310. 7. Electrical: 120-V ac, 60 Hz. VIDEOTAPE RECORDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. CBC (America) Corp. 5. COP -USA. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page8 Facilities Security Project 0201 i 6. Crest Electronics, Inc. 7. ElbexLimited. 8. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 9. JVC Professional Products. 10. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 11. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 12. Pelco. 13. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 14. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 15. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 16. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 17. Toshiba Security Products. 18. Ultrak, Inc. 19. Veltek International, Inc. 20. Vicon Industries, Inc. 21. Videology Imaging Solutions, Inc. B. Industrial, time-lapse type, designed for continuous operation. Tape format is 112 inch using industrial - grade, T-120 cassettes. 1. Horizontal Resolution: 400 lines, minimum. 2. Recording Heads: Rotary -scan type. 3. Integral Timer: Permits programming of recording operation for adjustable daily and weekly periods. 4. Time -Lapse Operating Modes: Multiple, covering 24 to 240 hours, minimum. 5. Other Operating Modes: a. Manual play and recording at two- and six -hour speeds. b. Forward and reverse high-speed search. C. Reverse, slow, and single -frame play. B. Alarm Recording: Operating mode is automatically switched from time-lapse to two- or six -hour recording mode when an externally generated alarm signal is received. 7. Audio Recording: 70 to 7000 Hz. Input: phono and microphone; output: phono. 8. Time and Date Generator: Records time and date legend in comer of recorded scenes. 9. Tape Counter. Displays tape position. 10. Manual Recording Lock: Key or keypad operated. Prevents unauthorized tampering or control changes during preset operation. 11. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: 45 dB for video output in the standard play mode. 12. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310, or freestanding desktop. 2.10 DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. AXCESS Inc. 5. CBC (America) Corp. 6. COP -USA. 7. Crest Electronics, Inc. 8. Dedicated Micros USA; Dedicated Microcomputers Limited. 9. ElbexLimited. 10. EverFocus Electronics Corp. 11. Hitachi Visual Technologies. 12. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 13. JVC Professional Products. 14. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 15. NexWatch. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page9 Facilities Security Project 16. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 17. Pelco. 18. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 19. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 20. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 21. SaramNcom, Inc. 22. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 23. Silent Witness Enterprises Ltd. 24. Ultrak, Inc. 25. Veltek International, Inc. 26. Vicon Industries, Inc. B. Digital, time-lapse type, full frame and motion recorder, with removable hard drive. 0201 1. Recording Time: 400 hours minimum. 2. Resolution: 720 by 480, minimum. 3. Programming shall be from trackball and push buttons on face of the recorder, settings shall be displayed on any video monitor connected to the recorder. Programming shall include the following: a. Motion analysis graph. b. Password protection. C. Alarm and timer controls. d. Continuous recording option. e. Time-lapse operating modes. f. Search video by time, event, or motion. 4. Programming: SmartMedia card for software updating, image archiving, and image transfer to a PC. 5. Storage: 80 GB, removable IDE hard drive. Software shall permit hot -swapping drives. 6. Compression: MPEG-2. 7. Time and Date Generator: Records time (hr:min:sec) and date legend of each frame. B. Audio Recording: 70 to 7000 Hz. Input: phono and microphone; output: phono. 9. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310, or freestanding desktop. 2.11 VIDEO SWITCHERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. AXCESS Inc. 5. CBC (America) Corp. 6. COP -USA. 7. Communications Specialties, Inc. 8. Convision Technology GmbH. 9. Crest Electronics, Inc. 10. Dedicated Micros USA; Dedicated Microcomputers Limited. 11. ElbexLimited. 12. EverFocus Electronics Corp. 13. Hunt Electronics USA, Inc. 14. Ikegami Electronics (USA) Inc. 15. JVC Professional Products. 16. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 17. Merit Li -Lin Ent. Co., Ltd. 18. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 19. Pelco_ 20. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 21. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page10 r Facilities Security Project 0201 22. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 23. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 24. Telpix Inc. 25. Toshiba Security Products. 26. Trinus Systems, Inc. 27. Ultrak, Inc. 28. Veltek International, Inc. 29. Vicon Industries, Inc. B. Quad Switch: For displaying images from four cameras on a single monitor. Provide color switcher if one or more cameras or monitors are in color. 1. Controls: Unit -mounted front panel. 2. Resolution: 720 by 480. 3. Modes: Auto, manual, and alarm. In manual mode, each channel can be also viewed in single *++ display mode. In the event of an alarm, alarming channel shall automatically switch to full screen. If several alarms are activated, channels in alarm shall be in auto -switching mode. 4. Channel Loss Alarm: Audible buzzer, occurrence details shall be recorded. b. Time: Indicate date and time. 6. Timing of Auto-Switcher. 1 to 30 seconds, selectable. x, 7. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310, or freestanding desktop. C. Manual Switch Bank: Low -loss, high -isolation, multiple -video switch to allow manual switching of multiple quad switches and cameras to a single output. Switches shall be illuminated. D. Sequential Switchers: Automatically sequence outputs of multiple cameras to single monitor and videotape recorder. _ 1. Switching Time Interval: Continuously adjustable, 5 to 20 seconds minimum, with manual override. 2. Skip -Sequential -Hold Switch: One for each camera, with LED to indicate active camera. 3. Camera Identification Legend: Either on -screen message or label at skip -sequential switch. 4. Alarm Switching: In the event of an alarm, alarming channel shall automatically switch the monitor , to full screen. 5. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310. E. Pan -Tilt -Zoom Controls: Arranged for multiple -camera control, with switches to select camera to be controlled. !^+ 1. Pan -and -Tilt Control: Joystick type. 2. Zoom Control: Momentary -contact, "in -out" push button. 3. Automatic -Scan Control: A push button for each camera with pan capability places that camera in automatic -scanning mode. 2.12 VIDEO MOTION SENSORS (INTERIOR) A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. AXCESS Inc. 3. ICU Security, Inc. 4. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 5. Visiontech. B. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal within a user -defined protected zone. Video inputs shall be composite video as defined in SMPTE 170. Provide an alarm output for each video input. 1. Detect movement within protected zone of intruders wearing clothing with a reflectivity that differs from that of background scene by a factor of two. Reject all other changes in video signal. 2. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of number of inputs. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section1376013age11 Facilities Security Project 0201 3. Controls: a. Size of detection zones. b. Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone. 4. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310. 2.13 CONTROL STATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. A & S Security Products, Inc. 2. ADEMCO Video; Pittway Corporation. 3. Alpha Systems Lab, Inc. 4. AXCESS Inc. 5. CBC (America) Corp. 6. COP -USA. T. Crest Electronics, Inc. 8. ElbexLimited. 9. Kalatel Inc.; an Interlogix company. 10. Panasonic Security Systems Group. 11. Pelco. 12. Philips Communication, Security & Imaging; Philips Electronics N.V. 13. Samsung Opto-Electronics America, Inc. 14. SANYO Fisher Company; SANYO North America Corporation. 15. Sensormatic Electronics Corporation. 16. Ultrak, Inc. 17. Veltek International, Inc. 18. Vicon Industries, Inc. B. Heavy-duty, freestanding, modular metal furniture units arranged to house standard mounting electronic equipment. Coordinate video surveillance component arrangement and wiring with components and wiring of other systems. C. Equipment Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310. D. Normal System Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, through a locked disconnect device and an isolation transformer in central -station control unit. Central -station control unit shall supply power to all components connected to it, unless otherwise indicated. E. Power Continuity for Control Station: Batteries in power supplies of central -station control units and individual system components shall maintain continuous system operation during outages of both normal and backup ac system supply. 1. Batteries: Rechargeable, valve -regulated, recombinant, sealed, lead -acid type with nominal 10- year life expectancy. Capacity adequate to operate portion of system served, including audible trouble signal devices for up to 4 hours and audible and visual alarm devices under alarm conditions for an additional 10 minutes. 2. Battery Charger. Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Charger shall recharge fully discharged battery within 24 hours. F. Annunciation: Indicate a change in system condition and switching of system or component to backup power. 2.14 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS A. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 75-ohms nominal impedance. Cables shall comply with Division 16 Section "Master Antenna Television System." VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Sectionl 3760 Pagel 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 0 B. Video Surveillance Coaxial Cable Connectors: BNC type, 75 ohms. Of three-piece construction, consisting of a crimp -type center tit, sleeve, and main body. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and as otherwise indicated. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces. B. Wiring Method: Install cables concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Grounding: Provide independent -signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.2 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb. B. Install cameras with 84-inch- minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance. C. Set pan unit and pan -and -tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust. D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise indicated. E. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system component enclosures, and mounted in self -protected, inconspicuous positions. F. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections at only the control station. 1. For 12- and 24-V do cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at the monitor end. G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting, testing, and adjusting of video surveillance equipment. rr, a. B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section 13760Page13 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: 1. Prepare equipment list described in Part 1 "Submittals" Article. 2. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses. 3. Set back -focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter. — 4. Set back -focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place. 5. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 6. Set sensitivity of motion detection. 7. Connect and verify responses to alarms. 8. Verify operation of control -station equipment. — D. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above. G. Record test results for each piece of equipment. H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions and to optimize performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses and adjust back -focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner' utilization of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Clean video surveillance system components, including camera -housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE _ Section 13760Page14 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video surveillance equipment. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components and settings for system controls. 3. Review equipment list and data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." �^ 4. Conduct a minimum of six hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's employees in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 13760 F VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Section13760Page15 r� Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL s■+ 1.1 SUMMARY .tee A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Mechanical demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. P. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code —Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. AMR C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS t BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 1 s Facilities Security Project 0201 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAgl, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 2 .r Facilities Security Project 2.5 SLEEVES 0201 A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. PW� C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. �-+ F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. • 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION �^* A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Milk 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same — or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store — equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. 1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section 'Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials. t. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. R'+ D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 61.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: i 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. r-+ _ H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 1. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/13 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. PR 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS 0201 A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 6 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.9 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and ^* anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. K E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 15050 row ram+ BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 7 r^ �j Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 2. Division 13 Sections on fire -suppression piping for fire -suppression pipe hangers. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-901 "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of "^ supported systems, system contents, and test water. C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports 9 PP 9 1 9 for piping and equipment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal -hanger shield insert indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze r� hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. r-• 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, ram± "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer. C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Hangers: a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc. b. B-Line Systems, Inc. C. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. f. Grinnell Corp. g. GS Metals Corp. h. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. I. National Pipe Hanger Corp. j. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. k. PHS Industries, Inc. 1. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 2. Channel Support Systems: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Grinnell Corp.; Power -Strut Unit. C. GS Metals Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. Thomas & Betts Corp. g. Unistrut Corp. h. Wesanco, Inc. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. C. PHS Industries, Inc. d. Pipe Shields, Inc. e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. Value Engineered Products, Inc. 4. Powder -Actuated Fastener Systems: a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. C. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components MSS SP-58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and r Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. C. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive -strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type i cellular lass or water -re ellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I P 9� _ YP g P YP Calcium silicate with vapor barer. 2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barer. 3. Material for Cold Piping: Water -repellent -treated, ASTM C 533, Type 1 calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 4. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water -repellent -treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 5. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 6. Material for Hot Piping: Water -repellent -treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 7. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 8. For Clevis or Band Hanger. Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 9. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. r 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Powder -Actuated Drive -Pin Fasteners: Powder -actuated -type, drive -pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical -Anchor Fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory -mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. ,• 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS ** A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system ..A Specification Sections. C. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, -- NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2) For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 314 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off -center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. - 10. Split Pipe -Ring with or without Turnbuckle -Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. - 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion -type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, _ if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal _ movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. D. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. E. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20); For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I -beams. 9. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I -beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel 1-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited. G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high -density, 100-psi minimum compressive -strength, water -repellent -treated calcium silicate or cellular -glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield. H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint -Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable -Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable -Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal; or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load -adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. C. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical -type supports and one trapeze member. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field - assembled channel systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 5 A-. Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Install powder -actuated drive -pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. F. Install mechanical -anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME 1331.9. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NIPS 3-112: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick., b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick, e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 6 e Facilities Security Project 0201 7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS �. A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 3.4 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot be shop -welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. n 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. r� END OF SECTION 15060 POR HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page 7 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, insulating cements, field -applied jackets, AND accessories and attachments. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Shop fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 2. Application of field -applied jackets. 3. Applications at linkages for control devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: h B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. e DUCT INSULATION Section 15081 Page 1 e- Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type Il, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I I for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet -Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. D. Field -Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 2. PVC Jacket: High -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. E. Accessories and Attachments: 1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Bands: Aluminum 3/4 inch wide. 3. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel -copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, galvanized steel. 4. Weld -Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper -coated steel pin for capacitor -discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 5. Adhesive -Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. H. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. I. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. J. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. DUCT INSULATION Section 15081 Page 2 F. Facilities Security Project 0201 K. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated e*� walls and partitions. L. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. M. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. 3.2 DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Round, supply -air, retum-air, and outside -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board . 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. B. Service: Rectangular, supply -air, retum-air, and outside -air ducts, concealed. ate+ 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. C. Service: Round, supply -air, retum-air, and outside -air ducts, exposed. F 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. D. Service: Rectangular, supply -air, retum-air, and outside -air ducts, exposed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. END OF SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION Section 15081 Page 3 sn Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL e*+ 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible piping insulation, insulating cements, field -applied jackets, accessories and attachments, and sealing compounds. FIR 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Shop fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. ,. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 6. Application of field -applied jackets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Opp PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. e�++ d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 3. Polyolefin Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. IMCOA. PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 1 r� R, Facilities Security Project 0201 4. Closed -Cell Phenolic -Foam Insulation: — a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory -applied, all-purpose, vapor -retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire -Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass -fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass -fiber insulation. 4. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor -retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 5. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type 11 for sheet materials. C. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density. D. Field -Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 2. PVC Jacket: High -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 3. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- thick, high -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC. E. Accessories and Attachments: 1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Bands: 3/4 inch wide aluminum. 3. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel -copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, galvanized steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. H. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 1. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. J. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. K. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. -, L. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Heating hot-, chilled-, and condenser- water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber . 3. Insulation Thickness: Y2" 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. b END OF SECTION 15083 Rn+ Plot PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 3 W 01 Facilities Security Project 0201 r^ SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, special -duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating, chilled -water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping. B. See Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping materials and installation requirements. C. See Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature -control valves and sensors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of special -duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow -control valves. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Welding certificates. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, 'Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. ' Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.4 COORDINATION PIN A. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. B. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are r"+ specified in Division 7 Sections. C. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. HYDRONIC PIPING Section 15181 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Copper Tube and Fittings: 1. Drawn -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. 2. Annealed -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. 3. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. 4. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 5. Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 6. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony. 7. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver). C. Steel Pipe and Fittings: 1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (fumace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 2. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric -resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. — 3. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless for NPS 2 and smaller and electric -resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250. 5. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. 6. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300. 7. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25,125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced. 8. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. 9. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable -iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure -responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 10. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 11. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome -plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section. 12. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures. D. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends. 1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket -type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe. 2. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493. E. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends. 1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket -type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.2 VALVES A. General -Duty Valves: Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." B. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated HYDRONIC PIPING Section 15181 Page 2 ,• Facilities Security Project 0201 orifice or ventud, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. D. Pressure -Reducing Valves: Diaphragm -operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure check valve; inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment. E. Safety Valves: Diaphragm -operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, intemal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. F. Plastic Ball Valves: 150-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, full port design, 1- or 2- piece body design, CPVC body and ball, polytetrafluoroethylene seats, EPDM seals, and tee handle; with threaded, socket, union, or flanged connections. G. Plastic Butterfly Valves: 150-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, PVC wafer body, polytetrafluoroethylene seats, lever lock handle, and wafer style for installation between flanges. 2.3 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vill, Division 1. Include the following fittings and accessories: 1. Air -Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper -plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless -steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Design tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; designed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 3. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. D. In -Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig' and liquid temperature up to 300 deg F. E. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with intemal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum working pressure of 150 psig and temperature of 250 deg F. F. Bypass Chemical Feeder. Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. G. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig working pressure; 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting. H. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. HYDRONIC PIPING Section 15181 Page 3 e� Facilities Security Project 0201 Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. J. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome -plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot and Chilled Water: Aboveground, use Type L drawn -temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed -temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within floor slabs. B. Condenser Water: Aboveground, use Type L drawn -temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed -temper copper tubing with brazed joints. C. Condenser Water: Schedule 80, PVC pipe with solvent -welded joints. D. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn -temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40, PVC pipe with solvent -welded joints. VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, use the following general -duty valve types for applications indicated: 1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves. 3. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. B. Unless otherwise indicated, use the following special -duty valve types for applications indicated: 1. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. 2. Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety -valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME•Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vill, Division 1, for installation requirements. 3. Install pressure -reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure. PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NIPS 314 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. B. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. C. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. D. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. HYDRONIC PIPING Section 15181 Page 4 rO* Facilities Security Project 0201 E. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure -reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. F. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with c requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. Install the following pipe attachments: :r 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. n 5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. 6. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: a. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. ,,..., b. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. C. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. d. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 318 inch. e. NPS 2-112: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. f. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 318 inch. 7. Install hangers for drawn -temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: a. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. b. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 114 inch. C. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. d. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. e. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. f. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. Elastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. 9. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for joint construction requirements for r soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent -welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. 1. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. r* 2. Install dip -tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward r' tank. Connect boiler -outlet piping. 3. Install in -line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger. 4. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain. 5. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain. HYDRONIC PIPING Section 15181 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 6. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. a. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping and perform testing according to ASME B31.9. Prepare written report of testing. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.10 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine -mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING — Section 15181 Page 6. Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15763 - FAN -COIL UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan -coil units and accessories. r^ 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan -coil unit type and configuration: 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. r� 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan -Coil Unit Filters: Furnish 6 spare filters for each filter installed. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish 2 spare fan belts for each unit installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company. 2. Carrier Corp. 3. Dunham -Bush, Inc. p-+ 4. Engineered Air. 5. International Environmental Corp. 6. Lennox Industries Inc. 7. Mario Coil. !" 8. McQuay International. FAN -COIL UNITS Section 15763 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 9. Rosemex Products. 10. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group. 11. U S A Coil & Air Inc. 12. York International Corp. 2.2 CONFIGURATION A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow -through configuration with direct -expansion cooling coil and hydronic heating coil. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges. B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1. Fire -Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall have a removable plastic liner and be insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan and liner shall be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection. D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels. 1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and attached with safety chain. E. Cabinet Finish: Bondenze, phosphatize, and flow -coat with baked -on primer with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory -assembled and -tested fan -coil unit before shipping. 2.4 WATER COILS A. Primary Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F. B. Auxiliary Heating Coil: One row, copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 220 deg F. 2.5 ELECTRIC -RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS A. Nickel -chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium -oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high -mass steel or corrosion -resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation. 1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters. 2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated. 2.6 FAN A. Centrifugal, with forward -curved, double -width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor. FAN -COIL UNITS Section 15763 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.7 FAN MOTORS . A. Motors for Direct -Drive Units: Shaded -pole, multispeed motor with integral thermal -overload protection and resilient mounts. B. Motors for Belt -Drive Units: Open dripproof with hinged mount and adjustable motor pulley. C. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Steel subbase, height as indicated. B. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan -coil units into ceiling or wall. C. Filters: 1-inch- thick, throwaway filters in fiberboard frames. 2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Two -Pipe, Valve Cycle: Wall -mounted thermostat, with manual fan -speed switch, cycles normally closed electric r valve. Manual switch mounted adjacent to thermostat changes control from heating to cooling. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL r� A. Test and rate units according to ARI 440. B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan -coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Install wall -mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. w C. Install new filters in each fan -coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. PIR i B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. "^ 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality -control testing and report results in writing: r 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. r B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. FAN -COIL UNITS Section 15763 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 END OF SECTION 15763 FAN -COIL UNITS Section 15763 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air -distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. B. See Division 15 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous -glass ducts. C. See Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field -fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. D. See Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. 1. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 2. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE e� A. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS r� A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, ."+ seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. ; C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page 1 r Facilities Security Project 0201 D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass -fiber -reinforced fabric. B. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. D. Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 b. Nexus Inc. C. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using comer, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are tined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static -Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 14nch wg . 2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg. 3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg. 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 L. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. M. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through - Penetration Firestop Systems." N. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. 3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof -test) load. D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. E. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. END OF SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS — Section 15815 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL Put r 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. ^! 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. n 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS 1. Manufacturers: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carnes. d. Dayus Register & Grille. e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart $ Cooley Div. f. Krueger. g. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. I. Price Industries. i. Titus. k. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal Fixed vertical spaced 3 inches apart. �-* 5. Rear Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal Fixed vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 7. Mounting Frame: Filter. 8. Mounting: Lay in. s*+ 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Section 15855 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 10. Accessories: Front -blade gang operator. B. Fixed Face Grille: 1. Manufacturers: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carries. d. Dayus Register & Grille. e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. f. Krueger. g. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus. j. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Mounting Frame: Filter. 7. Mounting: Lay in. 8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. 2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Manufacturers: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carries. d. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. e. Krueger. f. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. g. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus. j. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Face Style: Four cone. 6. Mounting: T-bar. 7. Pattern: Fixed. 8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid. 9. Accessories: a. Equaling grid. b. Plaster ring. C. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectonzing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. B. Perforated Diffuser: 0201 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Section 15855 Page 2 I■� Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Research Diffuser Products, Inc. b. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. d. Carnes. e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. f. Krueger. g. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. �.. h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. t F i. Price Industries. j. Titus. k. Tuttle & Bailey. I. Warren Technology. 2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with aluminum face. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. vw 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Duct Inlet: Round. �. 6 Face Style: Flush. 7. Pattern Controller. Four louvered deflector patches. 8. Mounting: T-bar. 9. Dampers: Opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. Equaling grid. b. Plaster ring. C. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION k 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING "'"'° A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Section 15855 Page 3 re+ ram+ Facilities Security Project 0201 4 SECTION 15861 -AIR FILTERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes factory -fabricated air -filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include dimensions; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; fumished specialties; and accessories for each unit indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments. 1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2. include Setting Drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. L . C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing and rating air -filter units. D. Comply with AR1 850. E. Electronic Air Cleaners and Electrical Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be n� incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AAF International. 2. Airguard Industries, Inc. 3. Bamebey & Sutcliffe Corp. 4. Columbus Industries, Inc. 5. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp. 6. Farr Co. 7. Flanders Filters, Inc. 8. International Air Filter, Inc. 9. Koch Filter Corp. . AIR FILTERS Section 15861 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 10. Research Products Corp. 0201 C. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory -fabricated, viscous -coated, flat -panel type, disposable air filters with holding frames. 1. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 2. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles. 3. Duct -Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. D. Extended -Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: Factory -fabricated, dry, extended -surface filters with holding frames. 1. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep -V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid. 2. Media and Media -Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard . 3. Duct -Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. E. Activated -Carbon Panel Filters: Factory -fabricated unit with activated -carbon media. 1. Media: Flat -panel, multilayer filter with inlet layer of polyester fibers, layer of activated -carbon granules bonded to fibers, layer of polyurethane foam, and housed in cardboard frame. 2. Duct -Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets and fasteners, capable of holding media and media frame in place and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Electronic Air Cleaners: Galvanized -steel assembly containing electronic agglomerator, prefilters, and independently supported and nested aluminum collection cells. 1. Ionizing Section: Alternately spaced grounded struts and charged ionizing wires. 2. Collecting Section: Alternately grounded and charged plates, with insulators located out of airstream. 3. Power Pack: Self-contained, prewired rectifying unit to convert 120-V, single-phase, 60-Hz ac power to approximately 12,000-V do for ionizer and 6000-V do for collector, include overload protection, on -off switch, and pilot light showing operating status. 4. Safety Accessories: Manual -reset safety switches and warning lights for filter plenum access doors, signal lights and safety switching upstream and downstream from unit within duct, and enameled high -voltage warning signs. G. Side -Service Housings: Factory -assembled, side -service housings, constructed of galvanized steel, with flanges to connect to duct system. 1. Integral Tracks: Accommodate 2-inch disposable or washable filters. 2. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive -locking devices. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door. 3. Sealing: Incorporate positive -sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate. B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. C. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air -handling unit installations. D. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections. END OF SECTION 15861 AIR FILTERS Section 15861 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Electrical demolition. 4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. r-* 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and cable with general construction work. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before closing in the building. E_ C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for service entrances and electricity -metering components. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. PART 2 - PRODUCTS _ 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Material: Cold -formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted -Steel Channel: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. Strength rating to suit structural loading. D. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the type and size of channel with which used. 1. Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16050 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -type hangers. F. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. G. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish. H. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type. I. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. J. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel. 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Device Colors: Use those prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick. C. Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. D. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed, vinyl tape compounded for permanent direct -burial service, and with the following features: - 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 3. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. F. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/1 6-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. G. Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted; comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII. Colors, legend, and size appropriate to each application. 1. Interior Units: Aluminum, baked -enamel -finish, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 2. Exterior Units: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate with 0.0396-inch, galvanized -steel backing. 1/4-inch grommets in comers for mounting. H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16050 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. ,, 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION a» A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four with, 200-lb minimum design load for each support element. 3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. B. Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. C. Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps except use spring- ,•, steel fasteners for 1-1/24nch and smaller single raceways above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. D. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core -drilled holes are used. r" Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Wood screws or screw -type nails. 2. Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of wall. 3. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall. 4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 5. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 6. Structural Steel: Welded threaded studs. a. Comply with AWS D1.1 for field welding. 7. Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws. 8. Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather -Exposed Locations: Stainless steel 9. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 10. Fasteners: Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof test load. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color -coding may be used for voltage and phase identification. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16050 Page 3 Facilities Security Project 0201 E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker. F. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Indoors install engraved plastic -laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. G. Install engraved -laminated emergency -operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire -resistance ratings of assemblies. Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7 Section 'Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.6 DEMOLITION A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS — Section 16050 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ,.". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Boggs, Inc. 3. Chance/Hubbell. 4. Copperweld Corp. 5. Dossert Corp. 6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. 7. Framatome Connectors/Bumdy Electrical. 8. Keamey/Cooper Power Systems. 9. Koms, C. C. Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. 10. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 11. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 12. Salisbury, W. H. & Co. 13. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 14. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. ..r 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation. C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. E. Bare, Solid -Copper Conductors: ASTM B 3. F. Assembly of Bare, Stranded -Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8. G. Bare, Tinned -Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33. H. Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16060 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 I. Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-518 ` inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. J. Tinned -Copper Bonding Jumper. Tinned -copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1- 5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. K. Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. compression type or exothermic -welded type, in kit form, selected per manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. 1. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits. 2. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct. 3. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. a. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. b. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal END OF SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING — Section 16060 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL r+ 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. r. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product Polk selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings. C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 ; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type XHHW-2 complying with NEMA WC 5. a-+ 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. ]Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. F CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 16120 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for ` application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type XHHW-2, in raceway. D. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type XHHW-2, in raceway. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wirelcable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." F. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." G. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. 1. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outset, with at least 12 inches of slack. END OF SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES — Section 16120 Page 2 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products. C. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor -box service fittings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets „ indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ` A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS r A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product k " selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 22 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING ^" A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. .� 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company, 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co. 10. Robroy, Inc. B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings: Compression type. F. FMC Zinc -coated steel G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. H. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Amco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. B. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. LFNC: UL 1660. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Square D. B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: RACEWAYS AND BOXES — Section 16130 Page 2 t, Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap -on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners. rye C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. r-. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. .�+ 2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Finish with manufacturers standard prime coating . 1. Manufacturers: a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The). b. Thomas & Betts Corporation. C. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). d. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. i B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturers standard color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. b. Enduro Composite Systems. C. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways. 2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc, 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. s� D. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 3 Facilities Security Project E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast -Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. G. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio -frequency -resistant paint. 0201 H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.8 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory - assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: 1. Exposed: PVC coated Rigid steel. 2. Concealed: pvc coated Rigid steel. 3. Underground, Single Run: PVC Coated Rigid Steel. 4. Underground, Grouped: PVC Coated Rigid Steel. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: 1. Exposed: EMT, except for security system components which shall be RMC. 2. Concealed: EMT, except for security system components which shall be RMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal k raceway runs above water and steam piping. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.' D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. .� 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor. sue„ I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. L. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears r*+ against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 5 Facilities Security Project 0201 O. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. P. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdrnrer-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. Q. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. R. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. S. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. T. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. U. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES _ Section 16130 Page 6 Facilities Security Project SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 0201 ,rw 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground -fault circuit interrupters, and integral surge suppression units. 2. Single -pole snap switches. 3. Device wall plates. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing r agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. C. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. + 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight -Blade -Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498. B. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Single- and Double -Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. B. Snap Switches: Heavy -Duty grade, quiet type. WIRING DEVICES Section 16140 Page 1 k: Facilities Security Project 0201 C. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac. 2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. B. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. C. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. D. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.- 1 . Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES -- Section 16140 Page 2 n Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1-GENERAL w*e 1.1 SUMMARY pow A. This Section includes distribution and branch -circuit panelboards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard, including the following: 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following data: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, and current, and voltage ratings. C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. Listing for series rating of installed devices. p„ e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. D. Field quality -control test reports. ' E. Operation and maintenance data. s*, 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE -- A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. s*a B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. PANELBOARDS Section 16442 Page 1 rs. Facilities Security Project 0201 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, suitable for environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Food Preparation Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush - mounted fronts, overlap box. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer coat. D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. E. Bus: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. F. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. G. Panelboard Short -Circuit Rating: 1. Listed with series -connected rating for protection by integral or remote upstream devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series -connected short-circuit rating. 2. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. H. Panelboards with Main Service Disconnect: Listed for use as service equipment. 1. Spaces for Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. J. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. K. Feed -through Lugs: Locate at opposite and of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 2.3 LOAD CENTERS A. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in, full -module circuit breakers. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Front mounted, and secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. Omit doors in fused -switch panelboards. B. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following: 1. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 3. Fused switches. PANELBOARDS Section 16"2 Page 2 i 0 Facilities Security Project 0201 2.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. _ 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. 1. Install flush unless otherwise indicated. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Install filler plates in unused protective device spaces. E. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 14nch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. F. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. C. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. 2. Test insulation resistance of panelboard bus with a megohmmeter, and ground continuity of cabinet and ground bus. Reject buses with insulation resistance less than 2 megohms. 3. Correct defective and malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. PANELBOARDS Section 16442 Page 3 r-+ Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows: 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant — deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16442 PAN€LBOARDS Section 16442 Page 4 Facilities Security Project 0201 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE '* A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing " agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. ram+ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Air -Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air -diffuser -boot assembly specified in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air -diffuser -boot assemblies. '-• 2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity. 3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units. 4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of retum-air volume. 5. Static Fixtures: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active units. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 1 Facilities Security Project 0201 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output except for emergency lamps powered by in -fixture battery -packs. 2. Externally fused with slow -blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current. B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with NEMA C82.11. 2. Ballast Type: start, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps. 4. Sound Rating: A. 5. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82.11. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A. 7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor. Less than 1.7. 9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Intemally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light -emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp life. C. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 2.5 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery - inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Switch and Light -Emitting -Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with minimum seven-year nominal life. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Low -Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 2 .. Facilities Security Project 0201 B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated, 12 gage. .� E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel,12 gage. A*+ F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture comers. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable. D. Air -Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment. E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensifies. i END OF SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 3